Dodge Ram Power Wagon Operating instructions

Dodge Ram Power Wagon Operating instructions
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Van Conversions/Campers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
䡵 Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body
modifications or special equipment installed by van
conversion/camper manufacturers/ body builders. See
the Warranty information book, Section 2.1.C. Such
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters,
stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
service on these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the conversion/camper manufacturer should
also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions
are missing, please contact your selling dealer for assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the
applicable manufacturer.
1
6 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on a
stamped plate located on the left front corner of the
instrument panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle
through the windshield. This number also appears on the
Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a
window on your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient
record of your vehicle identification number and optional
equipment.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN plate.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 Power Wagon Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Sentry Key — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
䡵 Ignition And Steering Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Manual Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Automatic Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
䡵 Door Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Manual Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .24
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .28
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . .43
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Automatic Locking Mode (If Equipped) . . . . . .44
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
䡵 Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Power Windows—If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Sliding Rear Window—If Equipped . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)—Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .70
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
▫ Lock Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
POWER WAGON: THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE
STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Your Power Wagon is a specialty vehicle, equipped with
several features not available on other production trucks.
It is very important that you read the following sections
of the owner’s manual before operation.
Features
(See page 80 for more information.)
Instrument Panel and Controls
(See page 155 for more information.)
Operation
(See page 220 for more information.)
Emergencies
(See page 334 for more information.)
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The double sided keys may be inserted into the locks
with either side up. The keys for your new vehicle are
enclosed in a plastic bag with a bar code label affixed to
the front. The bar code can be used to order duplicate
keys from your dealer or a locksmith. If you received
your keys without the bag, ask your dealer to give you
the number.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door when the key is in the
ignition switch, a chime will sound to remind you to
remove the key.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock
all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPED
With this system, an electronically coded ignition key
sends a signal to the vehicle electronics. If the electronics
recognizes the signal, the vehicle will start and continue
to run. If the system does not recognize the signal the
vehicle will start and run for a maximum of 2 seconds
after the initial key ON. After six unsuccessful attempts
at starting, the system will shut down until the correct
key is used.
NOTE: The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not
compatible with remote starting systems. Use of these
systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a
loss of security protection. Additional Sentry Keys or
Mobil Speed-pass™ devices held against or immediately
adjacent to the ignition key when starting the engine may
cause vehicle starting problems. If a problem occurs,
remove the Sentry Key from the key-ring and attempt to
start the vehicle again. Pagers, cell phones, walkman, etc.
will have no effect on this system.
The ⬙Security Light⬙, located in the instrument cluster,
will illuminate for about 2 seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned to the ON position. If the vehicle
electronics do not receive a valid signal from the ignition
key, the ⬙Security Light⬙ will flash continuously to signal
that the vehicle has been immobilized. If the ⬙Security
Light⬙ remains on during vehicle operation, it indicates a
fault in the system electronics. If this option was ordered,
all of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been
programmed to the vehicle electronics.
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit PIN. This number is required for dealer
replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer
Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A
blank key is one which has never been programmed and
needs to be cut.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys to the dealer.
Customer Key Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid keys by doing the following:
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition and turn the
ignition to the ON position for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition back to the OFF
position and remove the first key.
2. Insert the second valid key and switch the ignition to
the ON position within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds the
⬙Security Light⬙ will begin to flash. Turn the ignition back
to the OFF position and remove the second key.
3. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition and switch
the ignition to the ON position within 60 seconds of
having removed the second key. After 10 seconds the
⬙Security Light⬙ will stop flashing, then turn on for 3
seconds; then turn off.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
The new Sentry Key has been programmed. Repeat this
process to program up to an additional 6 keys. A maximum of 8 keys can be programmed to the system,
including the original keys provided with the vehicle.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION AND STEERING LOCK
Insert the key fully, and then turn the switch to one of the
five illustrated positions. The key can be inserted or
withdrawn only in the LOCK position.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Transmissions
When the steering wheel is in the LOCK position, the
steering and ignition systems are locked to provide
antitheft protection for your vehicle. It may be difficult to
turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your
vehicle. Move the steering wheel left and right while
turning the key until it turns easily. To remove the key,
depress and hold the release button located between the
ignition switch and the instrument panel. Turn the ignition key to LOCK and remove the key.
Manual Transmissions
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Automatic Transmissions
In the LOCK position, the steering and ignition systems
are locked to provide antitheft protection for your vehicle. It may be difficult to turn the key from the LOCK
position when starting your vehicle. Move the steering
wheel left and right while turning the key until it turns
easily. The key can be inserted or withdrawn only in the
LOCK position. Push in on the key in the ignition lock
cylinder to rotate to the LOCK position.
NOTE: The steering wheel will the lock when the key is
removed, and the steering wheel is turned around 115
degrees from center clockwise and around 65 degrees
counterclockwise.
2
Automatic Transmissions
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, the key cannot be turned to LOCK until the
selector is in the PARK position. Do not attempt to pull
the shift lever out of PARK after the key is in the LOCK
position.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR KEY
The same key used to start the vehicle is also used to
unlock the doors. To unlock the vehicle doors, insert the
key into the lock and turn.
To lock the doors, insert the key and turn.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Locks
Front and Rear doors may be locked, by moving the lock
plunger up or down.
All doors may be opened with the inside door handle
without lifting the lock plunger. Doors locked before
closing will remain locked when closed.
The ignition key will unlock all the locks on your vehicle.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with remote keyless entry do
not have a passenger side door lock cylinder.
Vehicles equipped with power door locks can be locked
or unlocked from inside by either the use of the door lock
switches located on the front doors or by pressing the
LOCK or UNLOCK buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry
key fob (if equipped).
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Central Locking — If Equipped
Vehicles with security will have a feature called ⬙Central
Locking⬙. When the key is placed in the door cylinder
and turned to the ⬙Unlock⬙ position, the security will be
disarmed, the illuminated entry will be turned on and
that door will be mechanically unlocked. If the key is
once again turned to the unlock position within 5 seconds
of the first unlock, the remaining doors will unlock. If the
key is turned to the ⬙Lock⬙ position while all doors are
closed, illuminated entry will be canceled, security will
begin arming, and all doors will lock.
As a safety feature the doors will not lock when using the
door lock switches during the following condition:
1. The driver’s door is open while the key is in the
ignition.
Automatic Door Locks
If this feature is enabled, your door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph.
This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped
from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the
following procedure:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure).
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Within 10 seconds cycle the key from the OFF position
to the ON position four times; ending in the ON position
( Do not start the engine ).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the LOCK direction.
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
been disabled.
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
Auto Unlock Feature
This feature unlocks all the doors of the vehicle when the
driver’s door is opened first. The following conditions
must be met:
• The driver’s door must be opened first.
• The Automatic Door Lock feature must be enabled.
• The doors of the vehicle must be locked automatically
by the Automatic Door Lock feature.
• The vehicle is in P (Park) and the ignition switch is in
the Off position.
This feature will not operate if any of the conditions
above are not met or following has occurred:
• Any manual operation of a door lock switch has
occurred.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Unlock Feature Programming
This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped
from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the
following procedure:
Customer Programming sequence to disable or enable:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel
any chiming that may be confusing during this programming procedure).
3. Insert the key into the ignition.
4. Within 4 seconds, cycle the key from the OFF position
to the ON position four times ending in the ON position
(do not start the engine).
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
in the UNLOCK direction.
6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
been changed.
7. To reactivate the feature, repeat the above steps.
8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be changed. If necessary repeat
the above procedure.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the childprotection door lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door and slide the
control UP to engage the locks and DOWN to disengage
the child-protection locks. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: After setting the child protection door lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors from
distances up to about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held
radio transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at
the vehicle to activate the system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
To unlock the doors:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors. When the UNLOCK button is pressed, the
illuminated entry will initiate, the parking lights will
flash on twice and if installed, the cargo lamp will turn on
for 30 seconds.
5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
(i.e. functional) key fob.
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the
following procedure:
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF position or wait 60
seconds.
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt.(Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
programming procedure).
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position ( Do not start the
engine ).
6. Continue to hold the UNLOCK button, wait at least 4
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the LOCK button.
7. When a single chime is heard, release both buttons.
9. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
10. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be changed. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To lock the doors:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. If the ignition is OFF, when the doors are
locked, the parking lights will flash on once and the horn
will chirp once.
The horn chirp feature will be shipped from the assembly
plants activated. If desired this feature can be disabled by
using the following procedure:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel
any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure).
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position (Do not start the
engine).
5. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
(i.e. functional) key fob.
6. Continue to hold the LOCK button, wait at least 4
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the UNLOCK button.
7. When a single chime is heard, release both buttons.
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF position or wait 60
seconds.
9. Test the horn chirp feature by pressing the LOCK
button on the key fob with the ignition in the OFF
position, or the key removed.
10. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with
the park lamp flash feature activated. If desired, this
feature can be disabled by using the following procedure:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel
any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure).
9. Test the park lamp flash feature by pressing the LOCK
button on the key fob with the ignition in the OFF
position or the key removed.
3. Place the key into the ignition.
10. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position (Do not start the
engine).
11. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
5. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
(i.e. functional) key fob.
6. Continue to hold the LOCK button, wait at least 4
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the PANIC button.
7. When a single chime is heard, release both buttons.
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF position or wait 60
seconds.
Using the Panic Alarm
To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press
and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once.
When the Panic mode is activated, the interior lights will
illuminate, the headlamps and parking lights will flash,
and the horn will sound.
To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC
button on the transmitter a second time. Panic mode will
automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if the vehicle is
started and exceeds 15 mph. During the Panic Mode, the
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
door locks and remote keyless entry systems will function normally. Panic mode will not disarm the security
system on vehicles so equipped.
2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel
any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure).
Programming Additional Transmitters
Vehicles with the keyless entry option will be shipped
from the assembly plants with two key fob transmitters
programmed only for that vehicle. A total of four fobs can
be programmed for your vehicle. Additional fobs can be
programmed to your vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob.
3. Place the key into the ignition.
NOTE: When entering program mode using that fob,
ALL currently programmed fobs will be erased and you
will have to reprogram them for your vehicle. However,
if program mode is entered and no action is performed,
the previously programmed fobs will continue to function.
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position ( Do not start the
engine ).
5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
(i.e. functional) key fob.
6. Continue to hold the UNLOCK button, wait at least 4
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and
hold the PANIC button.
7. When a single chime is heard, release both buttons.
The chime indicates that the system is in program mode.
8. Press and release both the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons, simultaneously on the fob to be programmed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
9. A single chime will be heard. The chime indicates that
the fob has been recognized.
10. Within 4 seconds of hearing the chime, press and
release any button on the fob being programmed.
11. A single chime will be heard. The chime indicates
that the fob has been programmed.
12. Repeat steps 8 to 11 for a total of 4 fobs.
13. Turn the ignition to the OFF position or wait 60
seconds to exit program mode.
14. Your vehicle will remain in program mode for up to
60 seconds from when the original chime (i.e. Step #7)
was heard. After 60 seconds, all programmed fobs will
function normally.
NOTE: If you do not have a programmed transmitter,
contact your dealer for details.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your Keyless Entry Transmitter fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of the
batteries is from one to two years.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
Transmitter Battery Service
1. With transmitter buttons facing down, use a flat blade
or dime to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart.
Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket during
removal.
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Be careful not to
disturb the metal terminal near the batteries. Install the
batteries with the positive terminal up, reference the note
⬙+ SIDE UP⬙ on the inside of the bottom half of the
transmitter case. Avoid touching the new batteries with
your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If
you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
The recommended replacement battery is a 3V lithium
2016 cell. This transmitter requires two batteries.
3. To reassemble the transmitter case snap the two halves
together. Make sure there is an even gap between the two
halves. Test transmitter operation.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for
unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
system provides both audible and visual signals. For the
first 3 minutes the horn will sound and the headlights
and security telltale will flash repeatedly. For an additional 15 minutes only the headlights and security telltale
will flash. The engine will run only if a valid Sentry Key
is used to start the vehicle. Use of the Sentry Key will
disable the alarm.
Rearming of the System:
The security system will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of headlights and security telltale flashing,
if the system has not been disabled. If the condition
which initiated the alarm is still present, the system will
ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors
and ignition.
To Set the Alarm:
The alarm will set when you use the power door locks,
turn the key in the driver’s door lock cylinder, or use the
Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors. After all the
doors are locked and closed the SECURITY light in the
instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the
system is arming. The security light in the instrument
panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to
indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set,
the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate
that the system is armed.
NOTE: If the SECURITY light stays on continuously
during vehicle operation, have the system checked by
your dealer.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Disarm the System:
Use the Keyless Entry transmitter or the key to turn the
driver’s door lock to the unlock position. If something
has triggered the system in your absence, the horn will
sound three times when you unlock the doors and the
security lamp will flash for 30 seconds. Check the vehicle
for tampering.
The Security system will also disarm, if the vehicle is
started with a programmed Sentry Key. If an unprogrammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle, the engine
will run for 2 seconds and then the security alarm will be
initiated. To exit alarming mode, press the transmitter
Unlock button, unlock the driver’s door using the key
cylinder, or start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry
Key.
The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the
vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter, the alarm
will sound when you pull the door handle to exit. You
may also accidentally disarm the system by unlocking
the driver’s door with the door key and then locking it
manually with the lock plunger. The door will be locked
but the Security Alarm will not arm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WINDOWS
Power Windows—If Equipped
2
The control on the left front door panel has up-down
switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on
the front passenger door for passenger window control
and on the rear doors of Quad Cab models. The windows
will operate only when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON or ACC (Accessory) position.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Down (Driver’s Side Only)
The driver’s window switch has an Auto Down feature.
Press the window switch past the detent, release, and the
window will go down automatically.
Window Lockout Switch (4 Door Models Only)
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window lock button. To enable the window controls,
press the window control button again.
Sliding Rear Window—If Equipped
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down or partially open positions. This is a
normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and
rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and, if so
equipped, window bags for the driver and passengers
seated next to a window. If you will be carrying children
too small for adult-size belts, your seat belts also can be
used to hold infant and child restraint systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Quad Cab front center
seating position have combination lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best. Wearing your belt in the wrong place could
make your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for
more than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect
you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on
your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In
a sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. And a
belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries.
Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt
over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be
used together.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the airbag deployed.
Standard Cab Front Center Three Point Belt
1. The front center seat belt on the Standard Cab may be
disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas
behind the front seats. The black latch plate can be
detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on
the inboard side of the passenger seat. Insert the vehicle
ignition key into the center white slot on the black buckle.
The black buckle latch plate can be removed when the
key is pressed into the buckle. Allow the retractor to take
up the surplus webbing, and the buckles will hang
vertically from the cab back exit bezel, thus freeing up all
the area behind the front seats.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WARNING!
Detaching Buckle with Key
2. To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat, pull
the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back
panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there
is an audible click. Refer to the previous section for the
proper seat belt usage.
• If the black latch and black buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
• When reattaching the black latch and black
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the black latch and
black buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
the black latch and black buckle.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Inserting Latch Plate
In Use Position
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING!
If the black latch and buckle are not connected when
the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will
not restrain you properly.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt
away from your neck. Press the button located on the
upper belt guide, and then move it up or down to the
position that serves you best.
2
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Locking Mode (if Equipped)
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is only
available on the front passenger side belt.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger
front seating position. Children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever
possible.
Center Lap Belts
The center seating position for the Quad Cab front seat
has a lap belt only. To fasten the lap belt, slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ To lengthen
the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull. To remove slack,
pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug
against the hips. Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust
the belt as tightly as is comfortable.
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the automatic locking mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous.
• A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down
and under the belt in a collision.
• A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash
forces to the abdomen, not to the stronger hip
bones. In either case, the risk of internal injuries
is greater. Wear a lap belt low and snug.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove any slack from the seat belt system in the event of
a collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all
size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the airbag control
module. Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use
items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy
the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced.
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated
if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10
seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8
km/h).
3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
4. Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to
signify that you have successfully completed the programming.
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert).
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Warning
Light to turn off.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the extender when not needed.
Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)—Airbag
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations
that allow less forceful deployments.
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or
•
•
This vehicle may also be equipped with window bags to
protect the driver and passengers in the first and second
row sitting next to a window. If the vehicle is equipped
with window bags, they are located above the side
windows. Their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
•
attempt to manually open them. You may damage the
airbags and you could be injured because the airbags are
not there to protect you. These protective covers for the
airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags
are inflating.
Do not mount any aftermarket equipment such as trailer
brake controllers, snowplow controllers, auxiliary light
switches, radios, etc. on or behind the knee bolster. Knee
bolsters are designed to work with the air bag and seat belt
to protect you. Mounting any additional equipment on or
behind the knee bolster can cause injury during a crash.
If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do not stack
luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location
of the window bag. The area where the window bag is
located should remain free from any obstructions.
If your vehicle is equipped with window bags, do not have
any accessory items installed which will alter the roof,
including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof
racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with the seatbelts, front airbags work with the instrument
panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for
the driver and front passenger. Window bags also work
with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is so equipped,
the window bag on the crash side of the vehicle is
triggered in moderate to severe side collisions. In certain
types of collisions, both the front and side airbags may be
triggered. But even in collisions where the airbags work,
you need the seat belts to keep you in the right position
for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
• Children 12 years and under should ride buckled up in
a rear seat, if available.
• Infants in rear facing child restraints must NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front
airbag unless the airbag is turned off (Standard Cab
Vehicles Only). An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position. See the
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch section.
• If your vehicle does not have a rear seat, see the
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch section.
• Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt (see section on Child Restraints)
should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster
seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat.
Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
• The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to
inflate.
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• If the vehicle has window airbags, they also need
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or
window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
• Airbag Control Module
• AIRBAG Readiness Light
• Driver Airbag
The Window Airbag System, on vehicles equipped,
consists of the following:
• AIRBAG Readiness Light (shared with the front airbag
system)
• Window Bags Above the Side Windows.
• Passenger Airbag
• Airbag Control Module (shared with the front airbag
system)
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Side impact sensors
• Instrument Panel
• Interconnecting Wiring
• Crash Sensor
How The Airbag System Works
• Interconnecting Wiring
• The airbag control module determines if a frontal
collision is severe enough to require the airbags to
inflate.
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Passenger Side Frontal Airbag ON/OFF Switch (Standard Cab Vehicles Only)
• The airbag control module will not detect roll over, or
rear collisions.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The airbag control module also monitors the readiness
of the electronic parts of the system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions.
These include all of the items listed above except the
knee bolsters, the instrument panel, and the steering
wheel and column. If the key is in the ⬙Off⬙ position, in
the ACC position or not in the ignition, the airbags are
not on and will not inflate
• The airbag control module also turns on the AIR BAG
light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds when
the ignition is first turned on, then turns the light off.
• If it detects a malfunction in any part of the
system, it turns on the light either momentarily or continuously. The instrument cluster
will flash the seat belt indicator if it detects a fault with
the airbag indicator.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIR BAG light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked
right away.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
• When the airbag control module detects a collision
requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A
large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate
the airbags. The airbag covers separate and fold out of
the way as the airbags inflate to their full size. The
airbags fully inflate in milliseconds. This is less time
than it takes you to blink your eyes. The airbags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger. The driver’s front airbag deflates
through vents towards the instrument panel. The
passenger’s front airbag is deflated through vent holes
in the sides of the airbag. In this way the airbags do
not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
• The knee impact bolsters help protect the knees and
position you for the best interaction with the front
airbag.
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch – (Standard Cab
Vehicles Only)
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The passenger front airbag is to be turned off only if the
passenger:
WARNING!
• is an infant (less than 1 year old) who must ride in the
front seat because there is no rear seat, because the rear
seat is too small for a rear-facing infant restraint or
because the infant has a medical condition which
makes it necessary for the driver to be able to see the
infant,
Whenever an airbag is turned off, even a lap/
shoulder belted passenger may hit their head, neck,
or chest on the dashboard (instrument panel) or
windshield in a crash. This may result in serious
injury or death.
• is a child, age 1 to 12 who must ride in the front seat
because there is no rear seat, because there is no rear
seat position available, or because the child has a
medical condition which makes it necessary for the
driver to be able to see the child,
To Shut Off the Passenger Airbag (Standard Cab Vehicles Only)
• has a medical condition which makes passenger airbag
inflation (deployment) a greater risk for the passenger
than the risk of hitting the dashboard (instrument
panel) or windshield in a crash.
Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch, push the key in and turn clockwise, and remove
the key from the switch. This will shut off the passenger
side airbag. The “Off” light near the switch will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
To Turn On the Passenger Airbag (Standard Cab Vehicles Only)
Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch, push the key in and turn counterclockwise, and
remove the key from the switch. This will turn on the
passenger airbag. The “Off” light near the switch will be
off when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the air bag
control module detects a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, and then immediately to deflate.
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another collision. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Window Airbags Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)—If Equipped
The window airbag control module determines if a side
collision is severe enough to require the side airbags to
inflate. The window airbag control module will not
detect roll over, front or rear collisions.
The airbag control module monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition
switch is in the ⬙START⬙ or ⬙RUN⬙ positions. These
include all of the items listed above. The airbag control
module also turns on the AIRBAG light in the instrument
panel for 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition is first turned
on as a diagnostic or system check, then turns the light
off. If it detects a malfunction in any part of the system,
it turns on the light either momentarily or continuously.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
The side (window) impact SRS Airbags are designed to
activate only in certain side collisions. When the airbag
control module detects a collision requiring the window
bags to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of
the vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the window bag. The inflating window bag
pushes the side pillar molding out of the way and covers
the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 milliseconds
(about one-quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes)
with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the window bag inflates. This especially applies to
children. The window bag is only about 3 1⁄2 inches (8.9
cm) thick when it is inflated.
Enhanced Accident Response System
If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition,
approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle has stopped
moving, the interior lights will light until the ignition
switch is turned off.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag Systems
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured because the airbags are not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or
the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolster.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your
protection in an impact. While the airbag system is
designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system
promptly:
• The airbag light does not come on or flickers during
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned on.
• The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine
related gauges are not working, the airbag control module may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready
to inflate for your protection. Promptly check fuse numbers 52 and 53 in the fuse and relay center. See your
dealer if the fuse is good.
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time — babies and children, too. Every state in the United
States and all Canadian provinces require that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
Infants and Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is
correct for your child:
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag
unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag deployment
could cause severe injury or death to infants in this
position.
• Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
• The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seat back,
they should use a belt-positioning-booster seat. The
child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the
lap portion.) For further information refer to
www.seatcheck.org.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat, or in the front seat if the
passenger’s front airbag is Off. If the airbag is left
On, a rearward facing child restraint in the front
seat may be struck by a deploying passenger
airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to
the infant.
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• The passenger seat belts are equipped with either
cinching latch plates or switchable seat belt retractors,
which are designed to keep the lap portion tight
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on
the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will
tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the
belt tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen
with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it
tight if necessary.
If the seat belt has a switchable retractor, it will have a
distinctive label: Pull the belt from the retractor until
there is enough to allow you to pass through the child
restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle. Then
pull on the belt until it is all removed from the retractor.
Allow the belt to return to the retractor, pulling on the
excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child
restraint. Refer to the ⬙Automatic Locking Mode⬙ earlier
in this section.
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Identification dots are located above the standard cab
front seat lower anchorages as a guide for locating lower
anchors.
NOTE: For children riding in the front seat of a Standard Cab model refer to the “Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch” located in this section.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. LATCH child restraint
anchorage systems are installed in the Standard Cab
passenger seat position and the Quad Cab rear seat
outboard positions and also feature tether strap anchorages, which must be used, located behind the seatback
(refer to Child Restraint Tether Anchor later in this
section).
Standard Cab Passenger Seat
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their
older products.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
Quad Cab Outboard Seat
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belting.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Installing the Child Restraint System
WARNING!
Do not install child restraint systems equipped with
LATCH attachments in the center position of a Quad
Cab model rear seat. The LATCH anchorages in this
seat are designed for the two outboard seating positions only. A child may be placed in the rear center
seating position of a Quad Cab model using the seat
belt and child tether anchorage. Failure to follow this
may result in serious or fatal injury.
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instructions that come with the child restraint system.
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash
into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or
even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the
anchor positions directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap. Follow the
instructions below. See your dealer for help if necessary.
Child Restraint Tether Anchor
Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to tether anchors have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for their older products.
Regular Cab models of Ram Pickups have two tether
anchorages, one each behind the front center and right
seats. Quad Cab models have three anchorages, one
behind each of the rear seats.
Tether Anchorage Points at the Right and Center
Front Seat (Regular Cab - All Seats)
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under
the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the
seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
2. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to
the square opening in the sheet metal.
Multiple Child Restraint Installation Sequence (Quad Cab Rear Seats)
3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Obtain tether straps by raising the head restraints and
reaching between the rear glass and rear seat. The tether
strap may be retained with an elastic band. Accessibility
to the tether strap is greatly improved by raising the seat
cushion to the “up” position. Remove the elastic before
use.
2. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and
then to the anchor directly behind the center rear seat.
3. Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint
and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat.
Regular Cab With Any Bench Seat
4. Route each tether strap to the anchor behind the center
seat, and attach the hooks to the metal ring.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and
to the anchor directly behind the right seat.
6. Install each child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
2
Multiple Child Restraints
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300
miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds
up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While
cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the limits
of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Avoid wide open throttle acceleration in low gear.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality, energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with the anticipated climatic conditions under which vehicle operation will
occur. The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
discussed in Section 7 under Maintenance Procedures,
Engine Oil.
NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS
MUST NEVER BE USED.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles of operation. This is a normal part of the
break-in and is not an indication of difficulty.
CAUTION!
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) your new
vehicle is driven, do not tow a trailer. Doing so
may damage your vehicle.
• Limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h) during the
first 500 miles (805 km) of towing.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
This vehicle is designed to carry passengers in the cab
only. For safety reasons, NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lock Your Vehicle
Always remove the keys from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended, even in your
own driveway or garage. Try to park your vehicle in a
well-lighted area and never invite theft by leaving articles of value exposed.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, a potentially toxic gas that by itself is colorless and odorless.
To avoid inhaling these gases, the following precautions should be observed:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in
or out of the area.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for more than a short period, adjust
your climate control system to force outside air into
the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed and the
controls in any position except OFF or MAX A/C.
• The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system;
exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle; or damage to
the underside or rear of the vehicle. Have a competent
mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace or adjust as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the front airbags have deployed. If there is any
question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the
belt.
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see you
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. If there is a problem with the airbag light the
seatbelt light will flash.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Vehicle
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching and locking.
Tires
Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns.
Check for stones, nails, glass or other objects lodged in
the tread.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if fuel fumes are
detected the cause should be located and corrected.
Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check wheel
nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure.
Lights
Check the operation of all exterior lights. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Power Wagon Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
▫ Skid Plates And Underbody Protection . . . . . . .82
▫ Locking Front And Rear Differentials . . . . . . . .80
▫ Wheel Flares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ 4.56:1 Gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
▫ Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Electronically Disconnecting Stabilizer/Sway
Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Standard Package Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Increased Ride Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ 12,000 Lb. Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ High-Pressure Monotube Shocks/New Front
And Rear Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Off-Road Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Mopar Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
▫ Inside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror— If Equipped . . . .85
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
▫ Electronic Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . .87
▫ Manual Rotary Lumbar Support Adjustment
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster And Heated
Sideview Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .88
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . .88
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
䡵 Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Headlamp Delay — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 111
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights . . . . . 111
▫ 40-20-40 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Daytime Running Lights (Canada And Fleet
Vehicles Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Reclining Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
䡵 Multifunction Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
䡵 Overhead Console— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . 115
䡵 Overhead Console With Compass/Temperature
Mini-Trip Computer — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . . 118
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ US/M Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Global Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Step Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
▫ Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
3
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Trip Odometer (ODO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Elapsed Time (ET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ C/T Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Opening Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Automatic Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Closing Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Manual Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ To Put Into a Calibration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Outside Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Venting Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Programming Homelink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Canadian Programming/Gate Programming . . 134
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Using Homelink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Erasing Homelink Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Reprogramming a Single Homelink Button . . . 135
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
䡵 Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Storage And Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 143
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
䡵 Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders
— Automatic Transmission Only . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Rear Cupholder — Quad Cab
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped . . 142
䡵 Pickup Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
䡵 Slide-In Campers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
䡵 Easy-Off Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
3
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER WAGON FEATURES
Locking Front and Rear Differentials
Most 4WD trucks are equipped with open differentials
front and rear. This design is used because it allows each
wheel to turn independently helping to eliminate binding when cornering. A disadvantage of using an open
differential is when one or more wheels lose traction; all
of the power is directed to those wheels resulting in a loss
of momentum. The Power Wagon is equipped with
electronically locking front and rear differentials. These
differentials, when engaged, mechanically lock together
the axle shafts forcing the wheels to spin at an equal rate.
This allows the vehicle to maintain its momentum and
thus prevents it from becoming stuck. The locking front
and rear differentials should only be engaged during
low-speed, extreme off-road situations where one wheel
is likely to not be in contact with the ground. It is not
recommended to drive the vehicle with the differentials
locked on pavement due to the reduced ability to turn
and speed limitations.
4.56:1 Gears
This is the highest axle ratio available in a full-size
pickup. The high gearing helps to compensate for the
increased rolling mass and increase diameter of the
off-road tires. As well, there are many advantages to a
higher axle ratio in off-road applications. When driving
downhill the high gearing enables the driver to use the
engine to slow the vehicle down in a more controlled
manner. When driving up a steep grade, the ratio helps
by keeping the truck in its power band helping to
maintain upward momentum.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
Electronically Disconnecting Stabilizer/Sway Bar
Stabilizer bars are used to help distribute load force from
one side of the vehicle to the other. This helps to reduce
body roll and create a smoother ride during on-road
driving. However, this becomes a disadvantage when the
vehicle is driven off-road when a higher level of suspension articulation is needed. By disconnecting the stabilizer bars, each wheel can now reach its maximum range
of movement. This enables the vehicle to maintain a
greater tire contact patch, and thus more traction, when
traversing severe off-road terrain.
Increased Ride Height
Due to the use of longer springs and monotube shocks,
the Power Wagon has an increased ride height of approximately 1.4 inches in the front and 1.0 inch in the
rear. It allows the truck to traverse larger obstructions
and provides a better seating position from which to
view the trail. A major advantage to increasing ride
height is the positive effect it has on approach/departure
and break over angles. More ride height allows for more
aggressive angles, further improving off-road capability.
12,000 lb. Winch
The 2005 Power Wagon is the ⬙only pickup truck⬙ to offer
an electric vehicle recovery winch from the factory. The
winch provides the vehicle with an additional level of
capability and versatility. This winch uses the electrical
power from the vehicle charging system to power a
motor that winds wire rope onto the winch drum via
planetary gear reduction. By nature, a winch is capable of
generating very high forces and should be used with
care. Do not operate the winch without reading and
understanding the complete winch section of owner’s
manual, including all warnings and cautions.
3
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
High-Pressure Monotube Shocks/New Front and
Rear Springs
The new variable-rate shocks and revised springs help to
create a suitable on-road ride without compromising
off-road competency. The shocks are designed to provide
improved stability, durability, and suspension articulation.
Off-Road Tires
These tires are specifically designed for extreme off-road
use, while also maintaining quite on-road operation.The
tires utilize long-life compounds for increased durability,
and a deep-groove tread for extra traction. The LT285/
70R17 used provides a large contact patch for better
traction, two full-width steel belts for improved strength,
as well as a reinforced sidewall to help protect against
bruising and shredding.
Skid Plates And Underbody Protection
Steel skid plates protect the major driveline components
of the truck including the fuel tank, transfer case and
steering damper. In addition the Power Wagon is
equipped with boxed cross membes and fore/aft rails.
This additional protection allows the vehicle to be utilized in severe off-road situations that would be considered impassable by a normal truck.
Wheel Flares
Not just for looks, the wheel flares on the Power Wagon
were designed to help cover its new larger off-road tires.
The larger flares also help to reduce the amount of debris
that can be flung up by the more aggressive tread pattern
on the tires.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
Wheels
Stylish forged aluminum 17⬙ wheels give the Power
Wagon a powerful stance. Forging a wheel from aluminum produces a stronger, lighter weight wheel than
machining or casting the wheel out of the same material.
• Steering Dampener Skid Plate - protects the steering
dampener from impingement damage.
Standard package features:
• Electronically Disconnecting Stabilizer/Sway Bar - improves mobility and articulation by disconnecting the
Stabilizer/Sway Bar.
• Fuel Tank Skid Plate - protects the fuel tank from
impingement damage.
• Transfer Case Skid Plate and Tubing - protects the
transfer case and exhaust catalyst from impingement
damage.
• Heavy Duty Cross Members - protects the under
carriage and supports the under body protection skid
plates.
• Fore/Aft rails - which connect the cross member for
additional support and prevent the truck from getting
hung up on large rocks between the cross members.
• Electronically Locking Front And Rear Axle Differentials With 4:56 Gears - improves mobility and articulation by locking the differentials.
• 160 Amp Alternator - supplies increased electrical
power for the winch and other off-road accessories.
• Heavy Duty Battery - supplies increased electrical
power for the winch and other off-road accessories.
• Heavy Duty Cooling Fan - provides enhanced engine
and transmission cooling under vigorous off-road
conditions.
3
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Off-Road Tuned Suspension And Shocks - improves
mobility, ground clearance and ride comfort.
• Gloves
• “Power Wagon embossed” storage bag
• Heavy Duty Thermally Protected and Sealed Electric
Winch With Roller Fairlead - Useful for work and
vehicle recovery.
• Bed Liner - protects the bed from impingement damage
• 17 Inch Forged Aluminum Wheels With 33 Inch Tires
- improves traction and differential ground clearance.
NOTE: These Mopar options have been specially designed and tested for the Power Wagon to meet the
vigorous off-road conditions.
Mopar Options:
• Rock Rails - protects the door sills from impingement
damage and provides a vehicle jacking point.
• Winch accessory kit - Contents include:
• Snatch Block/Pulley
• Clevis
• Tree strap
• Tow Strap
MIRRORS
Inside Mirror
The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
3
Automatic Dimming Mirror— If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror.
A light in the button will indicate when the dimming
feature is activated.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the
mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and
wipe the mirror clean.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in a right side convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on your right side
convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen
in the right side convex mirror. Some vehicles will
not have a convex right side mirror.
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature
All 6 x 9 inch exterior mirrors are hinged and may be
moved either forward or rearward to resist damage. The
hinges have three detent positions; full forward, full
rearward, and normal.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
Electronic Power Mirrors — If Equipped
3
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
Set the top switch to the left or right for the left or right
mirror, and set it to the center off position to prevent
accidentally moving a mirror when you are finished
adjusting the mirror. To adjust a mirror, select left or right
with the top switch, and press one of the four arrows for
the direction you want the mirror to move.
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated
Sideview Mirrors — If Equipped
The Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated
side view mirrors are activated by pressing the
heated grid button, located on the Climate Control panel,
with the ignition On. Turning Off the ignition will
deactivate the Electric Rear Window Defroster and
Heated side view mirrors feature. These features also
turn off after activation, when 15 minutes have elapsed.
To reactivate, simply press the button again.
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror
head to provide a greater vision range when towing
extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped Out or
In). A small blindspot mirror is integrated onto the main
mirror surface.
NOTE: Fold the 7 x 10 inch trailer towing mirrors
rearward prior to entering an automated car wash.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to fold the 7 x 10 inch trailer towing
mirrors forward. The 7 x 10 inch trailer towing
mirrors are not designed to be folded forward and
doing so will damage the mirrors and/or vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
3
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. UConnect™; allows you to dial
your cellular phone using simple voice commands (e.g.,
“Call” or “Dial”). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s stereo system; the system
will automatically mute your radio before receiving or
sending a call.
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s microphone for private conversations.
The UConnect™; phone book enables you to store up to
32 names and four numbers per name. This system is
driven through your Bluetooth™ Hands-Free Profile
cellular phone. UConnect™ features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard that enables different electronic
devices to connect to each other without wires or a
docking station, so UConnect™ works no matter where
you stow your cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or
briefcase). UConnect™ allows up to seven cellular
phones to be linked to the system, and it is available in
English, French, or Spanish formats (as equipped).
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system. The diagram below shows the mirror
with the appropriate buttons. Individual button behavior
is discussed in the “Operation” Section.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
prompts as well as the other party’s voice in a conversation will be played over your vehicle’s stereo system. The
volume of the UConnect™ system can be controlled
through your normal stereo controls.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as caller ID.
The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands
Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. If your
cellular phone has a different profile (i.e. headset profile),
you will not be able to use any UConnect™ features.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated into your
vehicle, including your vehicle’s stereo system. All voice
Operation
Voice commands can be used in the operation of the
UConnect™ system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu structure. Voice commands should be given
after each UConnect™ system prompt. You will be
prompted for a specific command and then guided
through the available options. There are two ways to give
commands to the UConnect™ system:
• You can say ⬙Dial⬙ at the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt. When
prompted for the phone number you wish to dial, say
the phone number (⬙123 456 7890⬙).
3
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pairing a Cellular Phone to the UConnect™ System
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone. To
complete the registration process, you will need to reference your cellular phone owner’s manual.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt, say ⬙Setup⬙.
• When prompted, say “ Phone Pairing”.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number into
the UConnect™ system which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone during the cellular
phone pairing process. You can enter any four-digit
pin number. You will not need to remember this pin
number after the initial registration process.
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you to begin
the cellular phone pairing process on your cellular
phone. Please see your cellular phone user’s manual
for instructions on how to complete this step.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 having the highest
priority. You can connect up to seven cellular phones
to your UConnect™ system and the priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if a priority 3 and priority 5
cellular phone are both in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Making a Phone Call Using Digit Dialing
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt, say ⬙Dial⬙ or ⬙Call⬙ followed
by the phone number you wish to dial. For example,
you can say ⬙Dial” wait for ready prompt 123 456 7890.
The phone number that you enter must be a valid
length.
Making a Phone Call Using Your UConnect™
Phonebook
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt, say ⬙Dial⬙ or ⬙Call⬙ wait for
the ready prompt followed by the name and designation of a phonebook entry that you wish to dial. For
example, you can say ⬙Call John Doe Work⬙.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt, say ⬙Phonebook New Entry⬙.
• Or, After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt, say “Phonebook”.
• When prompted, say “New Entry”.
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry.
• Next, enter the number designation (e.g. “Home”,
“Work”, “Mobile”, or “Pager”). This will allow you to
have multiple numbers for each phonebook entry.
• Recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that
you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
3
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names into the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations.
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt, say ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙.
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation that you wish to
edit. The choices are home, work, mobile, or pager.
• Recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry
that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
Phonebook edit can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later through phonebook edit.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt, say ⬙Phonebook Delete⬙.
• After you enter the phonebook delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry
that you wish to delete. You can either say the name of
a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can
say ⬙List Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the
phonebook from which you can choose. To select one
of the entries from the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition⬙ button while the UConnect™ system is playing
the desired entry and say ⬙Delete⬙.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
• After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you if you wish to delete the home, work, mobile,
or pager number for this entry.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt, say ⬙Phonebook Delete All⬙.
• The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt, say ⬙Phonebook List
Names⬙.
• The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name and say ⬙Call⬙.
• The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following feature(s) can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system.
3
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the stereo audio and
will ask if you would like to answer the call by pressing
the ’Phone’ button. Press the ’Phone’ button to answer
the call. To reject the call, press the ’Phone’ button until
you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call
was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, press the ’Phone’ button to place the
current call on hold and answer the incoming call. To
reject the incoming call, you can disregard the call and
continue with your current conversation.
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress.
Putting a Call on Hold and Retrieving a Call from
Hold
To put a call on hold, press the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep which will indicate that the call has
been placed on hold. To bring the call back from hold,
press the ’Phone’ button.
Toggling Between Two Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a double
beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recognition’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call. When the second call is established, press the
’Phone’ button until you hear a double beep indicating
that the two calls have been joined into one conference
call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, press the ’Phone’ button. All
calls in progress will be terminated.
Phone Redial
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt, say ⬙Redial⬙.
• The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. This may not be the
last number dialed by your UConnect™ system.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transferring an Active Call between the
UConnect™ System and Your Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows ongoing calls to be transferred to your cellular phone or to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system or vice versa, press the ’Voice Recognition’ button
and say ⬙Transfer Call⬙.
3
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt, say ⬙Setup⬙.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth™ connection between a paired cellular phone and
the UConnect™ system, follow the instruction described
in your cellular phone user’s manual.
• When prompted, say “ Phone Pairing”.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• You will be asked to say the name of the phone that
you wish to delete. You can either say the name of the
phone that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙All⬙ to
delete all the phones.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt, say ⬙Setup List Phones⬙ and
the UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from highest priority to lowest priority.
Connect or Disconnect the Connection between the
UConnect™ System and Your Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
Select a Lower Priority Paired Cellular Phone
Delete Paired Cellular Phones
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt, say ⬙Setup⬙.
• When prompted, say “Select Phone”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
• When prompted, say the phone name of the cellular
phone you wish to use, or say ⬙List Phones⬙ to hear a
list of all the phones that have been paired to your
UConnect™ system. To select a phone from the list,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Select⬙.
• The lower priority phone will only be used for the next
phone call. After that, the UConnect™ system will
return to using the highest priority phone in the
vehicle.
UConnect™ System Features
Barge In - Touch Tone Phone Inputs
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voice
mail system, an automated service, or any other phone
number that you can dial with any phone. When calling
a number with your UConnect™ system that normally
requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on your
cellular phone keypad, you can push the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you wish to enter
followed by ⬙Send⬙. For example, if required to enter your
pin number, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’ button
and say ⬙3 7 4 6 Send⬙, or whatever you have made your
pin. This method can also be used in instances where you
are pressing a number on your keypad to navigate
through a menu structure or to enter a number for a
pager.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ⬙, you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ⬙Pair A Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using, press the ’Phone’ button and say the name of the
language you wish to switch to (English, Español, or
Français as equipped). After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and voice commands will be in the
selected language.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g. the UConnect™ system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt, say ⬙Setup Confirmation⬙.
The UConnect™ system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice
to change it.
Low Signal, Battery Strength, and Roam
Notification
The UConnect™ system will provide notification to
inform you if your cellular phone is in roaming status,
has low signal strength, or has a low battery when you
are trying to place a phone call.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system. By dialing a
number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular phone, the
audio will be played through your vehicle’s stereo system. The UConnect™ system will work the same as if
you dialed the number using voice recognition.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Mute/Unmute
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ⬙Mute⬙. In order to unmute
the UConnect™ system; press the ’Voice Recognition’
button and say ⬙Unmute⬙.
Help
If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to
know what your options are at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙.
The UConnect™ system will play all the options at any
prompt if you ask for help.
Cancel
At any prompt, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and you will be
returned to the previous menu.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency, say ⬙Dial Emergency⬙ or ⬙Call
Emergency⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
your cellular phone to call 911.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance, say ⬙Dial Towing Assistance⬙ or ⬙Call Towing Assistance⬙. Please refer to the
24-Hour Towing Assistance coverage details in the
DaimlerChrysler Motors Company 24-Hour Towing Assistance Program Guide.
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
The seating options available in this truck are the result of
extensive customer research and evaluations.
40-20-40 Front Seat
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
As the name implies, the seat is divided into 3 segments.
The outboard seat portions are each 40% of the total
width of the seat. The back of the center portion (20%)
easily folds down to provide an armrest/center storage
compartment (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Each outboard seat is independently adjustable forward
or backward and is equipped with a back recliner. The
manual seat adjustment handle is found at the front edge
of each seat cushion. Pull up on the handle and slide the
seat to get the most comfortable position.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Reclining Seats
The recliner handle is on the outside of the seat cushion.
Pull up on the handle to release the seat back and adjust
for comfort.
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
You can be seriously, even fatally injured riding in a
seat with the seatback reclined. Do not ride with the
seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no
longer resting against your chest. If you ride in this
position, the shoulder harness will no longer be
restraining you. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and receive serious or fatal injuries.
Recline in a seat only when the vehicle is parked.
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
practical, at least to the level of the ears.
To lower the head restraint, push in the button and then
push down on the head restraint.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Manual Rotary Lumbar Support Adjustment — If
Equipped
Rotating the lumbar control knob on the left side of the
driver’s seatback and on the right side of the passenger’s
seatback increases or decreases the lumbar support.
Manual Lumbar Adjustment
Power Seats — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Don’t put anything under a power seat. It may cause
damage to the seat controls.
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
control seat height. Change the seat angle by using the
two toggle switches, tilting it up or down.
Up, Down, Forward, and Rearward
The power seat controls are on the outboard side of the
front seat cushions. Three switches control the seat movement. The four-way switch in the center can be moved
forward or backwards to get the most comfortable position. The same switch can be moved up and down to
Tilt Adjustment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The heated seat switches are located in the instrument
panel under the climate controls. The engine must be
running for the heated seats to operate.
Heated Seat Switches
Each heated seat switch has two settings (HI and LOW).
Press the switch once to obtain the desired heating
position and press a second time in the same direction to
turn the heated seats OFF. If you do not purposefully
turn the switch OFF, the heating element in the seat will
remain activated until the ignition is turned off. The
indicators on the switch will illuminate when the heated
seats are in the (HI or LOW) position. Flashing telltale
lights on the switch indicate that the Heated Seat system
needs servicing.
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at
the base of the instrument panel. Once the hood is
released you must reach into the opening beneath the
center of the grille and push up the latch to release the
safety catch before raising the hood.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are latched fully before
driving.
LIGHTS
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Lights
Courtesy/ dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the
second upward detent position, or if equipped, when the
UNLOCK button is pressed on the key fob. Rotating the
dimmer control to the optional fully upward position will
turn on the cargo light located on the back of the cab.
When a door is open and the interior lights are on,
rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the OFF
detent will cause all the interior lights to go out. This is
also known as the ⬙Party⬙ mode because it allows the
doors to stay open for extended periods of time without
discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are ON you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the
“Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, Load Shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for 15
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 15
minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlamps remain on while the ignition is cycled
off, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after 5
minutes. After 5 minutes timeout, if the headlamp switch
is turned off and then turned on, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off after 15 minutes.
If the dimmer control is rotated to the cargo lamp
position with the ignition off, the cargo lamps will
automatically turn off after 15 minutes.
NOTE: Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
Headlamp Delay — If Equipped
To aid in your exit, your vehicle, if equipped, can be
programmed by your dealer with a headlamp delay that
will leave the headlamps on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds.
This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF
while the headlamp switch is on, and then the headlamp
switch is cycled off. The headlamps will remain on for 60
seconds. Headlamp delay can be cancelled by either
turning the headlamp switch ON then OFF or by turning
the ignition ON.
Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights
When the headlight switch is rotated to the first
position, the parking lights, taillights, side marker
lights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights are all turned on. Rotating the headlight switch to
the first position will also turn on the cab top clearance
lights, flare lights, and tailgate lights if the vehicle is
equipped with these lights. The headlights will turn ON
when the switch is rotated to the second position. The
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
⬙LAMP OUT⬙ indicator will be illuminated in the instrument cluster if a defective bulb or wiring circuit is
detected for the headlamp system.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses
that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada and Fleet
Vehicles Only)
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started. This provides a constant ⬙Lights ON⬙
condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights
illuminate at less than normal intensity. If the parking
brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights will turn
off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, courtesy lights or cargo
lights are left on, after the ignition is turned off, a
continuous chime will sound when the driver’s door is
opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The foglights are turned ON by placing the headlight
rotary control in the parking light or headlight position
and pulling out the headlight rotary control. The fog
lights will operate only when the parking lights are ON
or when the vehicle headlights are ON low beam. An
indicator light located left of the switch will illuminate
when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off
when the switch is pressed in, when the headlight switch
is rotated to the OFF position or the high beam is
selected.
CARGO LIGHT
The cargo lights are turned on by rotating the dimmer
control to the optional fully upward position. The cargo
lights will also turn on for 30 seconds when a key fob
Unlock is pressed, as part of the illuminated entry
feature.
MULTIFUNCTION CONTROL LEVER
The multifunction control lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the lever up or down to signal a right-hand or
left-hand turn.
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes
to indicate the direction of the turn, and proper operation
of the front and rear turn signal lights. If a defective bulb
or wiring circuit is detected for the turn signal system, the
arrow indicators will flash at a faster rate. Also, the
⬙LAMP OUT⬙ indicator in the instrument cluster will be
illuminated and a chime will be heard. If an indicator
fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest
that the switch or indicator lamp is defective.
You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down.
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch
Pull the multifunction control lever fully toward the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from HIGH or
LOW beam.
Windshield Wipers
3
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction control lever. Turn the end of the handle to
select the desired wiper speed.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the LO continual speed position. The delay can
be regulated from a maximum of about 15 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every 2 seconds. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km) or less.
WARNING!
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push in on the washer knob on the end
of the multifunction control lever and hold while spray is
desired. If the washer knob is depressed while in the
delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds
after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer
knob is pushed, for a period greater than 1 second, while
in the OFF position, the wiper will wipe approximately
three wipes, after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
To tilt the column, push down on the lever below the turn
signal control and move the wheel up or down, as
desired. Release the lever to lock the column firmly in
place.
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device takes over accelerator operation at speeds greater than (refer to the table below for
the speed for your specific engine). The controls are
mounted on the steering wheel.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. In the
instrument cluster, the word “CRUISE” illuminates when
the system is on.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
and release the SET button. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, clutch
pressure while slowing the vehicle, or pressing the CANCEL button will deactivate speed control without erasing
the memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button to the OFF
position or turning off the ignition erases the memory.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control ON when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system to
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the
system OFF when you aren’t using it.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
RESUME button. Resume can be used at any speed above
(refer to the table below for the speed for your specific
engine).
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the speed control is on, speed can be increased by
pressing and holding the ACCEL button. When the
button is released, a new set speed will be established.
Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a speed
increase (refer to the table below for the speed for your
specific engine). Each time the button is tapped, speed
increases so that tapping the button three times will
increase speed by three increments.
Functions
Engage Speed
Minimun RESUME Speed
ACCEL Increase
DECEL Decrease
Dropout Speed
Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a speed
decrease (refer to the table below for the speed for your
specific engine). Each time the button is tapped, speed
will decrease. For example, tapping the button 3 times
will decrease the speed by 3 times the speed listed in the
table below (refer to the table below for the speed for
your specific engine).
To decrease speed while the speed control is on, press
and hold the DECEL button. Release the button when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
5.7L Engine
25 mph (40 km/h)
20 mph (32 km/h)
1 mph (2 km/h)
1 mph (2 km/h)
20 mph (32 km/h)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
To Accelerate For Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000
feet (610 meters), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded
(especially when towing) the vehicle may slow below the
SET speed. If the vehicle speed drops below (refer to the
table below for the speed for your specific engine), the
speed control will automatically disengage. If this happens, you can push down on the accelerator pedal to
maintain the desired speed.
Vehicles equipped with a 5–speed-manual transmission
should be operated in 4th gear or lower under the above
conditions.
Vehicles equipped with a Automatic transmission may
exhibit several downshifts under the above conditions.
To reduce the frequency of the downshifts and to improve vehicle performance, it is advisable to lock out
overdrive by pressing the “TOW/HAUL” button located
at the end of the gear shifter.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE— IF EQUIPPED
The two optional overhead consoles may consist of the
following features:
• Universal Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
Courtesy/Reading Lights
In the middle of the console are two courtesy/reading
lights.
Both lights illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is
opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (fully upward position), or when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry transmitter, if so equipped. These lights are also
operated individually as reading lights by pressing the
recessed area of the corresponding lens.
• Courtesy/Reading Lights
• Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC)
— If Equipped
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the vehicle is turned off, they will
extinguish after 15 minutes.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
OVERHEAD CONSOLE WITH
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE MINI-TRIP COMPUTER
— IF EQUIPPED
This optional overhead console consists of the following:
This overhead console allows you to choose between a
compass/temperature display and one of four trip conditions being monitored.
US/M Button
• Courtesy Lights
3
• Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC)
Use this button to change the display from U.S. to metric
measurement units.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
RESET Button
Global Reset
If the RESET button is pressed twice within 4 seconds
while in any of the 3 resettable displays, the Global Reset
will reset all 3 displays.
Step Button
Use this button to reset the following displays to zero:
Average Fuel Economy
Trip Odometer
Elapsed time
Use this button to choose or cycle through the four trip
conditions.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. This
display mode becomes less sensitive to instantaneous
changes in fuel consumption as the number of total
vehicle miles since the last reset increases. It is suggested
that this mode be reset periodically for general operation
or when driving conditions change significantly (for
example, at the end of a trip or when a trailer is
connected or disconnected).
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. The estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level.
When Distance To Empty = 0, the fuel gauge pointer will
initially be on the red “E” marker. At this point (fuel
gauge pointer on the red “E” marker) there is reserve fuel
capacity, which corresponds to approximately 8% of tank
volume. This reserve capacity was put in place to prevent
the likelihood of customers running out of fuel when
operating at maximum load conditions in areas where
there aren’t many gas stations.
NOTE: The Distance To Empty will remain equal to
zero, until the vehicle runs out of fuel or is refueled.
Ram fuel tank volumes are as follows:
• 34 gallons - short box models
• 35 gallons - long box models
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Trip Odometer (ODO)
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset.
Elapsed Time (ET)
This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time
since the last reset.
C/T Button
Use this button to select a readout of the outside temperature and one of eight compass headings that indicate
the direction in which the vehicle is facing.
WARNING!
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above
32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be icy, particularly
in woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such
conditions to prevent an accident and possible personal injury or property damage.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the CAL
symbol will be displayed.
After completing one 360° turn, with the vehicle traveling
less than 5 mph (8 km/h), in an area free from large metal
or metallic objects, the CAL symbol will turn off and the
compass will function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration
NOTE: To ensure proper compass calibration, make
sure the compass variance is properly set before manually calibrating the compass.
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does
not appear, you must manually put the compass into the
“Calibration” mode.
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Put Into a Calibration Mode
Turn on the ignition and set the display to “Compass/
Temperature.” Press and hold the RESET button to
change the display between VAR (compass variance) and
CAL (compass calibration) modes. When the CAL symbol is displayed complete one 360 degree turn in an area
free from large metal objects or power lines. The CAL
symbol will turn off and the compass will function
normally.
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
north and geographic north. In some areas of the country,
the difference between magnetic and geographic north is
great enough to cause the compass to give false readings.
If this occurs, the compass variance must be set according
to the Compass Variance Map.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
To set the variance: Turn the ignition ON and set the
display to “Compass/Temperature.” Press the RESET
button approximately five seconds. The last variance
zone number will be displayed. Press the STEP button to
select the new variance zone and press the RESET button
to resume normal operation.
Outside Temperature
Because the ambient temperature sensor is located underhood, engine temperature can influence the displayed
temperature, therefore, temperature readings are slowly
updated when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (30
km/h) or during stop and go driving.
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
For additional information on HomeLink威, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
WARNING!
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features it could
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information or assistance.
Programming HomeLink
NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is
advised to park outside the garage. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to
HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons, and
release only when the indicator light begins to flash (after
20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30
seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second
and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two
HomeLink buttons.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3
inches (3-8 cm) away from the HomeLink buttons while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink
button that you want to train and the hand-held transmitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with
procedures noted in the ⬙Gate Operator/Canadian Programming⬙ section.
4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons after the indicator light changes from the
slow to the rapid flash.
5. Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete and your device
should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed
and released.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat
step one.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and
then turns to a constant light, continue with ⴖProgrammingⴖ steps 6-8 to complete the programming of a rolling
code equipped device (most commonly a garage door
opener).
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit)
in the garage, locate the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button. This
can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
7. Firmly press and release the ⬙learn⬙ or ⬙smart⬙ button.
(The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step
eight.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two
seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button.
Repeat the ⴖpress/hold/releaseⴖ sequence a second time,
and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener
(or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming.
HomeLink should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, begin with ⬙Programming⬙ step two. Do not repeat
step one. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to ⬙time-out⬙ (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to ⬙time-out⬙ in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
programming a gate operator by using the ⬙Programming⬙ procedures (regardless of where you live), replace
ⴖProgramming HomeLinkⴖ step 3 with the following:
NOTE: If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device during the
⬙cycling⬙ process to prevent possible overheating.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release every two seconds (⬙cycle⬙)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
successfully been accepted by HomeLink. (The indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly.) Proceed with
⬙Programming⬙ step four to complete.
Using HomeLink
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
device may also be used at any time. In the event that
there are still programming difficulties or questions,
contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-3553515.
Erasing HomeLink Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons (individual
buttons cannot be erased but can be ⬙reprogrammed⬙ note below), follow the step noted:
• Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash-after 20 seconds.
Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30
seconds. HomeLink is now in the train (or learning)
mode and can be programmed at any time beginning
with ⬙Programming⬙ - step 2.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink Button
To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. DO
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds.
Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with
⬙Programming⬙ step 2
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at:
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold
down both outside buttons until the green light begins to
flash.
HomeLink威 is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof - Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called
Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof - Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof - Express
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called Express Vent, and
will occur regardless of sunroof position. During Express
Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switches remain active for 10 minutes
after the ignition switch has been turned off. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary electrical outlet can provide power for in
cab accessories designed for use with the standard “cigar
lighter” plug. The outlet is located in the instrument
panel below the ash receiver. A cap is attached to the
outlet base indicating “Power Outlet” 12V-20A.
There is an additional Power Outlet in the center console
of a 40/20/40 seat (if equipped).
The outlet(s) has/have a fused direct feed from the
battery so it/they receive power whether the ignition is
ON or OFF.
All accessories connected to this/these outlet(s) should
be removed or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use
to protect the battery against discharge.
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER
The ash receiver is opened and closed by pushing on the
front surface of the receiver and then allowing the
receiver to open.
The cigar lighter is located above and to the left of the ash
receiver.
As a child safety precaution, the lighter only operates
with the ignition switch ON. It heats when pushed in and
pops out automatically when ready for use. To preserve
the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the
heating position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
closed by pushing on the front surface. Each opening in
the cupholder is adjustable and will hold cups and mugs
of various sizes.
To secure the cup, place the cup to be held into one of the
cup wells and then push the cupholder arm toward the
cup until it is held stable.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Automatic
Transmission Only
Your new Ram truck is equipped with dual-opening
adjustable cupholders. The cupholder is opened and
Cupholders with Automatic
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cupholder — Quad Cab — If Equipped
Quad Cab vehicles may be equipped with a rear cupholder that consists of two cupwells for rear passenger
convenience.
STORAGE
Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped
The center portion of the seat folds down to provide an
armrest with unique storage compartments under the lid.
Push the button on the front of the armrest to raise the
cover. Inside there is a power outlet (if equipped),
removable coin holder (if equipped), and two dividers to
configure the storage area into compartments. For example, compartments can be configured to hold a lap-top
computer, a cellular telephone, CD’s and miscellaneous
items. The top of the cover provides a generous firm
surface to serve as a desktop for your “mobile office.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
WARNING!
• This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
operation, or an accident. Only use the center
seating position when the armrest is fully upright.
• In an accident, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs
(4.5 kg). These items could be thrown about
endangering occupants of the vehicle. Items
stored should not exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
Storage and Seats — If Equipped
Located in the center of the front 40/20/40 seat cushion
there is a storage compartment.
Standard cab models also have storage behind the seat.
The Quad Cab models provide additional storage under
the rear seat. Lift the seat to access the storage compartment.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED
Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped
Quad Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat, may be
equipped with a folding steel load floor.
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on
the load floor. While driving or in an accident you
may experience, abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration,
or sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor
may move around with force and strike occupants,
resulting in serious or fatal injury.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Unfolding the Load Floor
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
2. Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until
the load floor unfolds into position.
3
3. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Positioning the Load Floor for Storage Access Under
the Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the
load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load
floor.
WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up position.
When stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor
could move to the down position causing serious
injury.
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the
secured down position before you operate the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
PICKUP BOX
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of plywood, etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place lumber
across the box in the indentations provided above the
wheel housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form the
floor.
WARNING!
The pickup box is intended for load carrying purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit in
seats and use seat belts.
The pickup box on your new Ram has many features
designed for utility and convenience.
NOTE: If you are installing a toolbox to the front of the
pickup box, you must use Mopar威 toolbox brackets
available from your dealer.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Care should always be exercised when operating a
vehicle with unrestrained cargo. Vehicle speeds
may need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough
roads may cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo
that may result in vehicle damage. If wide building materials are to be frequently carried, the
installation of a support is recommended. This
will restrain the cargo and transfer the load to the
pickup box floor.
• If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg) of
material suspended above the wheelhouse, supports must be installed to transfer the weight of
the load to the pickup box floor or vehicle damage
may result. The use of proper supports will permit
loading up to the rated payload.
• Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an
accident causing serious or fatal injury.
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side
bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel
housings. Place wooden boards across the box from side
to side to create separate load compartments in the
pickup box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of
the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1000 lbs (450
kg) total.
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
DO NOT use slide-in campers on Power Wagon models.
EASY-OFF TAILGATE
The tailgate can be removed quickly. Tailgate removal is
sometimes required for pickup box loading. To remove
the tailgate unlatch the tailgate and remove the support
cables by releasing the lock tang from the pivot, then
rotate and pull away from the box. Once the cables are
free, move to the right side of the tailgate hinge bracket.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side
pivot clears the hanger bracket. Slide the entire tailgate to
the right to free the left side pivot. Remove the tailgate
from the vehicle entirely. Do not carry the tailgate loose in
the truck pickup box.
NOTE: Dual rear wheel pickup models require properly
spaced rear clearance lights. If such a vehicle is operated
without a tailgate, suitable lights must be installed.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly,
the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap
or Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the
overhanging camper compartment and be free of
leaks.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instruments And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Scan Button (Radio Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
䡵 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Cassette Player Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
䡵 Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ CD Changer Control Capability
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
䡵 Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
䡵 Sales Code RBB—AM/FM Stereo Radio With
Cassette Tape Player And CD Changer
Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Mode Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
䡵 Sales Code RAZ—AM/ FM Stereo Radio With
Cassette Tape Player, CD Player And
CD Changer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio . . . . . . . . . . . 172
▫ Power Switch, Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Seek Button (Radio Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
4
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Rewind (RW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Radio Data System (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Tape Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ PTY (Program Type) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ Changing Tape Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ Metal Tape Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Tone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ Pinch Roller Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ AM/FM Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
▫ Operating Instructions — CD Player . . . . . . . . 179
▫ To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory . . . . . . 176
▫ Inserting The Compact Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ To Change From Clock To Radio Mode . . . . . . 177
▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Operating Instructions — Tape Player . . . . . . . 177
▫ EJT CD (Eject) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ FF/Tune/RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Fast Forward (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Program Button 4 (Random Play) . . . . . . . . . . 180
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
▫ Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ Tape CD Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Time Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls — If Equipped . . 197
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
▫ CD Changer Control Capability
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
▫ Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
䡵 Sales Code RBK—AM/ FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player And CD Changer Controls . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ CD Changer Control Capability
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
䡵 Sales Code RBQ—AM/FM Stereo Radio With
6 - Disc CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
䡵 Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance . . . . . . . 198
䡵 Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 200
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
▫ Heater Only — Fleet Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Air Conditioning—If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 203
4
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster And Heated
Sideview Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Air Conditioning With Dual Zone Temperature
Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
4
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION
1. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
which monitors the emissions and engine control
system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
turned on and remain on, as a bulb check, until the
engine is started. If the vehicle is not ready for emissions
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
turned on and remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5
seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is started. If the
bulb does not come on during starting, have the condition investigated promptly.
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
for system service.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
4
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Voltage Gauge
When the engine is running, the gauge indicates
the electrical system voltage. The pointer should
stay within the normal range if the battery is charged. If
the pointer moves to either extreme left or right and
remains there during normal driving, the electrical system should be serviced.
NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of
the gauge, the “Check Gages” indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound.
3. Turn Signal Indicators
Lights in instrument cluster flash when outside turn
signals are operating.
4. Tachometer
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per
minute.
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
pointer at high rpm for extended periods. Engine
damage may occur.
5. Airbag Indicator Light
The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8 seconds
when the ignition is first turned on. If the light stays on,
flickers or comes on while driving, have the airbag
system checked by an authorized dealer.
6. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that headlights are on high
beam.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
7. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check.
During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or
when driving, if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled,
the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on
continuously. Refer to ⬙Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert™)⬙ in the Occupant Restraints
section for more information.
8. Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour and/or kilometers per hour.
9. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure when the engine is running. A continuous
high or low reading, under normal driving conditions,
may indicate a lubrication system malfunction. Immediate service should be obtained.
NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of
the gauge, the “Check Gages” indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound.
10. Cargo Lamp
The Cargo Lamp light will illuminate when the Cargo
Lamp is activated from the dimmer control switch,
located next to the headlight switch.
11. Door Ajar
The Door Ajar light will illuminate when any
door is opened. When the ignition is ON the
Door Ajar light will stay illuminated until the
open door is closed. When the ignition is OFF
the Door Ajar light will stay illuminated until the open
door is closed or the battery saver feature automatically
turns the light off.
4
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light 5.7L
Engines Only
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control system. If a problem is detected the light will come on while the
engine is running. If the light remains lit with
the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable,
however, see your dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
13. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge indicates engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range indicates that the cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The gauge needle will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, in heavy traffic, or when towing a
trailer. If the needle rises to the “H” mark, stop the
vehicle, shift into N (Neutral), and increase the engine
idle speed for 2 to 3 minutes. If the temperature reading
does not return to normal, shut your engine OFF and
allow it to cool. Seek authorized service immediately. See
Cooling System information in the section on “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of
the gauge, the “Check Gages” indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
CAUTION!
Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the
engine running as you would not be able to react to
the temperature indicator if the engine overheats.
14. Security
The light will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds
when the vehicle theft alarm is arming. The light will
flash at a slower rate after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about two seconds when the
ignition is first turned ON.
15. Transmission Range Indicator (Automatic
Transmissions Only)
When the gear selector lever is moved, this indicator
shows the automatic transmission gear range selected.
16. Cruise Light
This indicator lights when the electronic speed control
system is turned on.
17. Check Gages
This light illuminates when the Voltmeter, Engine
Oil Pressure or Engine Coolant Temperature
gages indicate a reading either too high or too low.
Examine the gages carefully, and follow the instructions
above for each indicated problem.
NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned to OFF, the
Fuel Gage, Voltmeter, Oil Pressure and Engine Coolant
Temperature gages may not show accurate readings.
When the engine is not running, turn the ignition switch
to ON to obtain accurate readings.
4
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
18. Brake System Warning Light
This light illuminates when the ignition key is turned to
the ON position and remains on for a few seconds. If the
light stays on longer, it may be an indication that the
parking brake has not been released. This light will
illuminate if the brake fluid is low, especially when
braking or accelerating hard. This light will illuminate if
the ABS indicator light has a malfunction. This light will
flash if the engine is running and the parking brake is on.
If the light remains on when the parking brake is
released, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction. In this case, the light will remain on until
the cause is corrected.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary
and continued operation of the vehicle in this condition is
dangerous.
Acceleration which causes the rear wheels to slip for a
period of time may result in the red brake light illuminating and a brake switch code being set on ABS
equipped vehicles. Depressing the brake pedal should
extinguish the red brake light.
19. ABS Warning Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
which is described elsewhere in this manual. This
light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the
ON position and may stay on for five seconds. If the ABS
light remains on or comes on during driving, it indicates
that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and that service is required. See your authorized dealer immediately. The ABS light could also
illuminate during loss of traction and remain illuminated
until the brake pedal is pressed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
20. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
If the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To
toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer,
press the Odometer/Trip Odometer Button. To reset the
Trip Odometer, press and hold the button while in trip
mode, until the Trip Odometer resets.
NOTE: There is also an engine hour function. This
indicates the number of hours the engine has been
running. To display the engine hours perform the following: Place the ignition in RUN, but do not start the
engine. With the odometer value displayed, hold the trip
button down for a period of 6 seconds. The odometer will
change to trip value first, then it will display the engine
hour value. The engine hours will be displayed for a
period of 30 seconds until the ignition is turned off or the
engine is started.
21. TOW/HAUL (Automatic Transmissions Only)
The TOW/HAUL button is located at the end of the gear
shift lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW/
HAUL button has been selected.
22. LAMP OUT Light
The LAMP OUT indicator in the instrument cluster alerts
the driver if a defective bulb or wiring circuit is detected
for most of the exterior lamps - headlamps, turn signal
lamps, and stop lamps.
23. SERV 4WD Indicator
The 4WD indicator will be illuminated whenever the
4WD mode is engaged for either the manual or electric
shift 4WD systems. The SERV 4WD indicator monitors
the electric shift 4WD system. If the SERV 4WD light
4
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the
4WD system is not functioning properly and that service
is required.
24. Low Wash Light
This light comes on when the washer fluid level falls
below approximately 1/4 filled. The light will remain on
until fluid is added and one minute has elapsed.
25. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button
Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the
trip odometer display. Holding the button in resets the
trip odometer reading when in trip mode.
26. Fuel Gauge
Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the
ON position.
27. Low Fuel Warning Light
Glows when the pointer is between “E” and 1/8
indication mark (approximately 15% of tank volume) on the fuel gauge. When the fuel gauge
pointer is on “E” (equivalent to Distance To Empty [DTE]
= 0 on the overhead console if so equipped) there is
reserve fuel capacity, which corresponds to approximately 8% of tank volume. This reserve capacity was put
in place to prevent the likelihood of customers running
out of fuel when operating at maximum load conditions
in areas where there aren’t many gas stations.
Ram fuel tank volumes are as follows:
• 34 gallons (129L) - short box models
• 35 gallons (132L) - long box models
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
28. Transmission Oil Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. If this
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the
engine at idle or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off.
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the time in hours and
minutes whenever the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position, or
when the radio frequency is being displayed, time keeping is accurately maintained.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” or “ACC”
position. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar
object, press either the “H” (Hour) or “M” (Minute)
buttons on the radio. The display will show the time.
2. Press the “H” button to set hours or the “M” button to
set minutes. The time setting will increase each time you
press a button.
4
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RBB—AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER AND CD
CHANGER CAPABILITY
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
RBB Radio
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding the button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Tune
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If the button is pushed and held,
the radio will continue to tune until the button is
released. The frequency will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pushed.
To Set The Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the “1–5” button you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be locked
into push-button memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the push-button twice.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
Audio
The audio button controls the BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and FADE.
4
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the AUDIO button and BASS will be displayed.
Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or decrease the
Bass tones.
Press the AUDIO button a second time and TREB will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or
decrease the Treble tones.
Press the AUDIO button a third time and BAL will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the AUDIO button a fourth time and FADE will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the
sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the AUDIO button again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Selection
Press the AM/FM button to change from AM to FM. The
operating mode will be displayed next to the station
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received in the FM mode.
Mode Button
Press the MODE button to select between the cassette
tape player, CD changer, or the Satellite Radio (if
equipped). When the Satellite Radio (if equipped) is
selected “SAT” will appear in your radio display.
A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the
Satellite or radio mode.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
Cassette Player Features
With ignition OFF and the sound system OFF, you can
eject the tape cassette by pushing the EJECT button.
The SEEK symbol appears on the display when Music
Search is in operation. Music Search shuts off automatically when a selection has been located.
You can turn the tape player ON by inserting a cassette or
activating the MODE button (with a cassette in the radio),
but only when the ignition and radio are on.
Selective Music Search
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 7 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc.
Each time a cassette is inserted the tape player will begin
playing on the side of the cassette that is facing up in the
player.
Music Search
Pressing the SEEK button while playing a tape will start
the Music Search mode. Press the SEEK button up for the
next selection on the tape and down to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the tape is within
the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Pressing the TUNE button up or down momentarily
activates Fast Forward or Rewind and makes the directional arrows appear on the display.
To stop Fast Forward or Rewind, press the TUNE button
again.
Time Button
Press the time button to toggle between station frequency
and time of day.
4
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button (Cassette Mode)
Pressing this button while playing a cassette tape will
change the side of the tape being played.
NR (Noise Reduction)
Pushing the Number 2 Pre-set button when a tape is
playing deactivates the Dolby Noise Reduction System*.
When Dolby is ON, the NR symbol appears on the
display. Each time a tape is inserted the Dolby will turn
ON.
* “Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The following instructions are for the radio controls that operate
this CD changer.
Mode Button
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until
CD information appears on the display.
Push-Button
While the CD changer is playing, press the NUMBER 1
push-button or the NUMBER 5 push-button to select a
disc numbered higher or lower than the one currently
being played.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
hold the RW button for fast reverse.
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and
fast reverse are activated.
Random Play (RND)
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of
pace.
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.
SCAN Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
CD Diagnostic Indicators
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
the player, and play will resume automatically.
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed
when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
4
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
• Excessive vibration
SALES CODE RAZ—AM/ FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER, CD PLAYER
AND CD CHANGER CONTROLS
• Disc inserted upside down
• Damaged disc
• Water condensation on optics
RAZ Radio
Operating Instructions — Radio
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is controlled by the
ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position to
operate the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
Power Switch, Volume Control
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume. The
volume will be displayed and continuously updated
while the button is pressed.
Seek Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the Seek button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. Holding
the button will by pass stations until you release the
button.
Tuning
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pressed.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The Radio Data System allows radio broadcasting stations to send data signals on a subcarrier frequency
which is added to the stereo signal. RDS was developed
to give FM receivers user-friendly features, such as
Program Service name (PS) and Program Type (PTY).
Program Service name is typically used by the broadcaster to display the station’s name or call letters, for
example ⬙WNIC⬙. Typically these are 8 characters in
length and are displayed by the radio for those stations
which are broadcasting this information. PTY (Program
Type) is used to characterize the station’s program material, for example ⬙Rock Music⬙.
4
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PTY (Program Type) Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Information
Jazz
Foreign Language
Radio Display
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Inform
Jazz
Language
Program Type
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
Radio Display
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,
the radio will return to the last preset station.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
Pressing PTY, then SCAN will scan the FM Band and stop
at all RDS stations. Each RDS station will be played for a
5 second scan once around the FM Band and stop at the
last station. The PTY icon will then turn off.
Balance
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker balance. Push in the button and it will pop out. Adjust the
balance and push the button back in. The balance will be
displayed and continuously updated while the button is
turned.
Fade
The Fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Push in the button and it will pop out.
Adjust the balance and push the button back in. The fade
will be displayed and continuously updated while the
button is turned.
Tone Control
Slide the Bass and/or Treble controls up or down to
adjust the sound for the desired tone. The treble, and bass
will be displayed and continuously updated while the
slide is moved.
4
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Selection
Press the AM/FM button to change from AM to FM. The
operating mode will be displayed next to the station
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received.
Scan Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next station, in either AM or FM, pausing for 5
seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the
next.
Pressing the AM/FM button continues the search in the
alternate frequency band.
To stop the search, press SCAN a second time.
To Set The Radio Push-button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the
push-button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a station is not selected within
5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into memory. You can recall the
stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the pushbutton twice.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
To Change From Clock To Radio Mode
Press the Time button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
Operating Instructions — Tape Player
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the
right and the mechanical action of the player will gently
pull the cassette into the play position.
NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,
the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm
up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
selection.
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc.
Fast Forward (FF)
Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
opposite direction.
Rewind (RW)
Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape
direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed
again or until the end of the tape is reached. At the end of
the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.
4
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tape Eject
Press the EJT Tape button and the cassette will disengage
and eject from the radio.
Scan Button
Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection.
Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature.
Changing Tape Direction
If you wish to change the direction of tape travel (side
being played), press the PTY button. The lighted arrow in
the display window will show the new direction.
Metal Tape Selection
If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player, the
player will automatically select the correct equalization
and the 70 symbol will appear in the display window.
Pinch Roller Release
If ignition power or the radio ON/OFF switch are turned
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
and the tape will resume play.
Noise Reduction
The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the
tape player is on, but may be switched off.
To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System: Press the
Dolby button (button 2) after you insert the tape. The NR
light in the display will go off when the Dolby System is
off. The Dolby System is automatically reactivated each
time a tape is inserted.
* ”Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
Operating Instructions — CD Player
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD player
will operate.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3⁄4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
Inserting The Compact Disc
The CD player contained within the radio is not a
multi-disc changer, and will only accept one CD. Gently
insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing
up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player.
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch from
radio to CD mode and begin to play. The display will
show the track number and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track one.
NOTE:
• You may eject a disc with the radio OFF. The ignition
switch must be in the ON or ACC position to insert a
disc with the radio OFF.
• If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player and the display will show the time of day. If
you insert a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will
show the time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.
4
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Seek Button
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first 10 seconds of the current selection.
EJT CD (Eject) Button
Press this button and the disc will unload and move to
the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to the
radio mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF.
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Program Button 4 (Random Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on the selected disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks. Press
the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward
feature. If TUNE RW is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press button 4 a second time to stop Random Play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
MODE
Press the MODE button to select between the tape player,
CD player, or satellite radio (if equipped).
Time Button
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day.
To select Satellite Radio (if equipped), press the MODE
button until the word SIRIUS appears. The following will
be displayed in this order: After three seconds, the
current channel name and number will be displayed for
five seconds. The current program type and channel
number will then be displayed for five seconds. The
current channel name and number will then be displayed
until an action occurs. A CD or tape may remain in the
player while in the Satellite Radio mode.
Scan Button
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
Tape CD Button
Press this button to select between CD player and Tape
player.
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The following instructions are for the radio controls that operate
this CD changer.
Mode Button
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until
CD information appears on the display.
Disc Up/Program Button 1
Press the DISC up (button 1) button to play the next
available disc.
4
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Disc Down/Program Button 5
Press the DISC down (button 5) button to play the
previous disc.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
hold the RW button for fast reverse.
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and
fast reverse are activated.
Random Play (RND)
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of
pace.
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.
CD Diagnostic Indicators
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
the player, and play will resume automatically.
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed
when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
• Excessive vibration
• Disc inserted upside down
• Damaged disc
• Water condensation on optics
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
SALES CODE RBK—AM/ FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER AND CD CHANGER
CONTROLS
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
RBK Radio
Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up or the bottom to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding the button in will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Tune
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
4
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pressed.
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the “1–5”
button you wish to lock onto this station and press and
release that button. If a button is not selected within 5
seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the push-button twice. Every time a preset
button is used a corresponding button number will be
displayed.
Audio
The audio button controls the BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and FADE.
Press the AUDIO button and BASS will be displayed.
Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or decrease the
Bass tones.
Press the AUDIO button a second time and TREB will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or
decrease the Treble tones.
Press the AUDIO button a third time and BAL will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Press the AUDIO button a fourth time and FADE will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the
sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the AUDIO button again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Selection
Press the AM/FM button to change from AM to FM. The
operating mode will be displayed next to the station
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CD Player Operation
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD player
will operate.
4
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Inserting The Compact Disc
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3⁄4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the display will show the time of day.
If the power is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD
mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The
display will show the track number and index time in
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track
one.
Seek
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first second of the current selection.
EJT — Eject
Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move
to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to
the radio mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The unit will continue in radio mode.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF
(except on convertibles).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Random Play — RND/Program Button 4
Press the RND (button 4) button while the CD is playing
to activate Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on
the selected disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.
Satellite Radio (if equipped). When Satellite Radio (if
equipped) is selected “SAT” will appear in your radio
display.
A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the
Satellite mode.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed CD playing time to time of day.
Press the RND (button 4) button a second time to stop
Random Play.
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The following instructions are for the radio controls that operate
this CD changer.
Mode
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, the optional remote CD changer and the
Mode Button
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until
CD information appears on the display.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
4
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Disc Up/Program Button 1
Press the DISC up (button 1) button to play the next
available disc.
Disc Down/Program Button 5
Press the DISC down (button 5) button to play the
previous disc.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
hold the RW button for fast reverse.
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and
fast reverse are activated.
Random Play (RND)
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of
pace.
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
CD Diagnostic Indicators
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
the player, and play will resume automatically.
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed
when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
SALES CODE RBQ—AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH 6 - DISC CD CHANGER
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
• Excessive vibration
4
• Disc inserted upside down
• Damaged disc
• Water condensation on optics
RBQ Radio
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the PWR/VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn
the volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is controlled by the
ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position to
operate the radio.
Mode
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between AM,
FM, the CD changer and Sirius Satellite Radio™ (if
equipped). The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received.
To select Sirius Satellite Radio™ (if equipped), press the
MODE button until the word SIRIUS appears. The following will be displayed in this order: After three seconds, the current channel name and number will be
displayed for five seconds. The current program type and
channel number will then be displayed for five seconds.
The current channel name and number will then be
displayed until an action occurs. CD’s may remain in the
player while in the Satellite Radio mode.
Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding the button in will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.
Tune
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If the button is pressed and held,
the radio will continue to tune until the button is
released. The frequency will be displayed and continuously updated while the button is pressed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET RND
button. SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the
“1–6” button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a button is not selected within
5 seconds after pressing the SET RND button, the station
will continue to play but will not be locked into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the corresponding push-button twice. Every
time a preset button is used, a corresponding button
number will be displayed.
Audio
The audio button controls the BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, and FADE.
Press the AUDIO button and BASS will be displayed.
Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or decrease the
Bass tones.
Press the AUDIO button a second time and TREB will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or
decrease the Treble tones.
Press the AUDIO button a third time and BAL will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the AUDIO button a fourth time and FADE will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the
sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the AUDIO button again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
4
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Time Button
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
CD Player Operation
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the Power / Volume control pushed ON
before the CD player will operate.
Inserting The Compact Disc
CAUTION!
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This CD player will accept 4 3⁄4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the display will show the time of day. If you insert
a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will show the
time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
LOAD/ EJT — Load
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the button with the
corresponding number where the CD is being loaded.
After the radio displays “load” insert the CD into the
player.
Radio display will show “loading” when it is being
loaded.
LOAD / EJT — Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the button with the
corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the
disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy
removal.
Radio display will show “ejecting” when it is being
ejected.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD. If the CD is removed and
there are no other CD’s in the radio, the radio will return
to the last selected AM or FM mode.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
Seek
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first second of the current selection.
4
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Scan
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Random Play — SET / RND
Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on the disc in
random order to provide an interesting change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press the SET / RND button a second time to stop
Random Play.
PTY (Program Type) Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button
repeatedly within 5 seconds will allow the program
format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not
currently broadcast PTY information.
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Emergency
Emergency Test
Radio Display
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
ALERT!
Test
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
Program Type
Information
Jazz
Foreign Language
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Radio Display
Inform
Jazz
Language
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Program Type
Talk
Top 40
Weather
Radio Display
Talk
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,
the radio will return to the last station.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
4
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pressing the SCAN button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will stop at every PTY station on the
band and list each corresponding program type in the
radio display.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed CD playing time to time of day.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
CD Diagnostic Indicators
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
the player, and play will resume automatically.
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed
when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
CD ERROR will appear on the display if the laser is
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
• Warped disc
• Excessive vibration
• Disc inserted upside down
• Damaged disc
• Water condensation on optics
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume. The center button of the
right hand control will allow you to change the mode.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the left side switch will SEEK up for
the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the
switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.
4
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tape Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
selection on the cassette. Pressing the bottom of the
switch once will go to the beginning of the current
selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it
is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second selection, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
function in this mode.
CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE
To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,
take the following precautions:
1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,
sound quality and tape durability will be greatly diminished.
2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from
slackness and dust when it is not in use.
3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat
and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is
adhering flatly to the cassette.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind
a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape
drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions.
COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the compact discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should
periodically clean the head with a commercially available
WET cleaning cassette.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged, oversized, or have theft
protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the operation of a cellular
phone in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened
or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna.
This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio
volume be turned down or off during cellular phone
operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The controls for the heating and ventilation system in this
vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs. These comfort
controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
Heater Only — Fleet Vehicles
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are identified by the small dots.
Panel
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel.
The mode control (at the right of the
control panel) can be set in any of the
following positions:
Recirculation Modes (Panel or Bi-Level )
Select the recirculation modes when
the outside air contains smoke or
odors. This feature allows for recirculation of interior air only. Air flows
through the panel outlets in this mode.
Air flows through the panel only or
through both the panel and floor vents
depending on the selected mode (panel vs bi-level).
4
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bi-Level
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and at the floor.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield, and the demister outlets located at the
edge of each side of the instrument panel.
Blower Control
The rotary knob on the left of
the control panel is the
blower control. Turn the knob
clockwise to one of the four
positions to obtain the blower
speed you desire. To turn the
blower off, turn the knob to
the far left position.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
Temperature Control
Air Conditioning—If Equipped
The rotary knob at the center
of the control panel controls
the temperature of the interior air. You can choose your
degree of comfort by rotating
the knob. The coldest temperature setting is to the extreme left (blue region) and
the warmest setting is to the
extreme right (red region) of
4
the rotation.
Air Conditioning Operation
To turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan
control at any speed and press the snowflake
button located at the right of the control panel.
Conditioned air will be directed through the
outlets selected by the mode control. A light in the
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
snowflake button shows that the air conditioning is on.
Press the button a second time to turn the air conditioning off.
Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed
when the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a
normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and
off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy.
The mode control (at the right of the
control panel) can be set in any of the
following positions:
Recirculation Modes (Panel or Bi-Level )
Select the recirculation modes when
the outside air contains smoke, odors,
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is
desired. This feature allows for recirculation of interior air only. Air flows
through the panel only or through
both the panel and floor vents depending on the selected mode (panel vs bi-level).
NOTE: Selecting a “Recirculation Mode” mode does not
necessarily consume more fuel than normal A/C mode.
Panel
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel.
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are identified by the small dots.
Bi-Level
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and at the floor.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
Floor
Blower Control
Outside air flows primarily through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets, and the air conditioning
may be on.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield, and the demister outlets located at the
edge of each side of the instrument panel, and the air
conditioning may be on.
The rotary knob on the left of
the control panel is the
blower control. Turn the knob
clockwise to one of the four
positions to obtain the blower
speed you desire. To turn the
blower off, turn the knob to
the far left position.
4
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Temperature Control
The rotary knob at the center
of the control panel controls
the temperature of the interior air. You can choose your
degree of comfort by rotating
the knob. The coldest temperature setting is to the extreme left (blue region) and
the warmest setting is to the
extreme right (red region) of
the rotation.
Circulation
The cab is designed with features to promote outside air
circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These
are air exhausters that provide the means for regular
exchange of cab air.
Side window demisters direct air flow specifically to the
window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the
glass. They are located in the extreme outside upper
edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also provide extra air ducts for circulation. They are in operation
whenever the Floor, Mix or Defrost modes are in use. To
remove frost from the side windows, it is best to use the
full defrost mode.
NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear a
hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of
time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air
conditioning system has been on. It is not an indication of
a problem with the air conditioning system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated
Sideview Mirrors — If Equipped
The Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated
side view mirrors are activated by pressing the
heated grid button, located on the Climate Control panel,
with the ignition On. Turning Off the ignition will
deactivate the Electric Rear Window Defroster and
Heated side view mirrors feature. These features also
turn off after activation, when 15 minutes have elapsed.
To reactivate, simply press the button again.
Air Conditioning with Dual Zone Temperature
Control — If Equipped
With the Dual Zone Temperature Control System, each
front seat occupant can independently control the temperature of air coming from the outlets on their side of
the vehicle.
4
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
snowflake button shows that the air conditioning is on.
Press the button a second time to turn the air conditioning off.
A/C Pushbutton
Air Conditioning Operation
To turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan control at any
speed and press the snowflake button located on the
control panel. Conditioned air will be directed through
the outlets selected by the mode control. A light in the
With the fan control in the ON position, pushing the A/C button turns on
the air conditioning compressor. An
indicator light on the button shows
that the Air Conditioning compressor
is on. Conditioned air is now directed
through the mode outlets selected.
Pushing the button a second time turns the compressor
OFF.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
Recirculation Pushbutton
Pushing the Recirculation button allows interior air to recirculate continuously in any position except defrost
and defrost/floor mode for rapid cool
down of the interior. See “Fast
Cooldown” later in this section.
Mode Control
The mode control allows you to
choose from several patterns of air
distribution.
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
the major modes. These intermediate positions are identified by the small dots and give an even blend of both
modes.
Panel
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to
direct the airflow.
Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and those located on the floor.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
4
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Heat
Blower Control
Outside air flows primarily through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets.
Defrost
Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
through the defroster outlets located at the base of
the windshield and side window demist outlets.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if
the A/C button has not been pressed. This dehumidifies
the air to help dry the windshield.
The rotary knob on the left of
the control panel is the
blower control. Turn the knob
clockwise to one of the four
positions to obtain the blower
speed you desire. To turn the
blower off, turn the knob to
the far left position.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
Dual Zone Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air
inside the passenger compartment. This is accomplished
by having separate temperature control slides for both
the driver and front passenger. The blue area of the scale
indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated
Sideview Mirrors — If Equipped
The Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated
side view mirrors are activated by pressing the
heated grid button, located on the Climate Control panel,
with the ignition On. Turning Off the ignition will
deactivate the Electric Rear Window Defroster and
Heated side view mirrors feature. These features also
turn off after activation, when 15 minutes have elapsed.
To reactivate, simply press the button again.
Circulation
The cab is designed with features to promote outside air
circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These
are air exhausters that provide the means for regular
exchange of cab air.
Side window demisters direct air flow specifically to the
window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the
glass. They are located in the extreme outside upper
4
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also provide extra air ducts for circulation. They are in operation
whenever the Floor, Mix or Defrost modes are in use.
NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear a
hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of
time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air
conditioning system has been on. It is not an indication of
a problem with the air conditioning system.
Operating Tips
Fast Cooldown
For a fast cooldown, turn the blower fan rotary knob to
the extreme right position, turn the mode control to the
panel fresh position, press the snowflake button to turn
on the air conditioning, and drive with the windows
open for the first few minutes. Once the hot air has been
expelled, close the windows and press the Recirculation
pushbutton. When a comfortable condition has been
reached, choose a mode position and adjust the temperature control slide and blower speed as necessary to
maintain comfort. For high humidity conditions it may
be necessary to remain in the Recirculation mode to
maintain comfort.
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases
turning on the Air-conditioning (pressing the snowflake
button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control,
air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort.
As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to
direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode
position on the control. Adjust the temperature control
and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher blower
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on the
windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
defrost mode.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high
quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 %
concentration is recommended. Refer to Recommended
Fluids and Genuine Parts for the proper coolant type.
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic
in hot weather especially when towing a trailer, additional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is
encountered, operate the transmission in a lower gear to
increase engine RPM, coolant flow and fan speed. When
stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to shift into
NEUTRAL and depress the accelerator slightly for fast
idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed.
NOTE: On models equipped with Diesel engines, the
idle speed will automatically increase to 1000 rpm at
elevated coolant temperatures to improve engine cooling.
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial
Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.
Winter Operation
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstructions.
4
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips Chart
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Axle Locker System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Airing Down For Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . 240
䡵 Stabilizer/Sway Bar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Vehicle Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
䡵 Power Wagon – Safe Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . 224
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
▫ Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
䡵 Winch Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . . 230
▫ Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
▫ Things To Know Before Using Your Winch . . . 246
▫ Understanding The Features Of Your Winch . . 248
▫ Winch Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ Operating Your Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Rigging Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
5
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 Ignition/Starter Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
䡵 Transmission Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Automatic Transmission With Overdrive . . . . . 270
▫ Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Manual Transmission — 6-Speed . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
䡵 Four-Wheel- Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Manually Shifted Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
▫ Manual Transmission Key Release Button . . . . 267
▫ Key Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Shifting Procedure - Manually Shifted Transfer
Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Transfer Case Reminder Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
䡵 Limited-Slip Differential — If Equipped . . . . . . . 281
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Brake Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 289
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 291
䡵 Tires—General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 299
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
䡵 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information . . . . . . . 304
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
▫ Sulfur In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
5
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
䡵 Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Connecting Trailer Lighting And Electric Trailer
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ Trailer Weight And Trailer Tongue Weight . . . . 323
▫ Trailer Towing Information (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . 326
▫ Cooling System Tips — Trailer Towing . . . . . . 326
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Automatic Transmission Oil Temperature
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
▫ To Maintain Warranty Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . 318
▫ Towing With An Automatic Transmission . . . . 327
▫ Axle Lubricant And Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . 320
䡵 Snowplow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Trailer Towing Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ Dodge Power Wagon Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Trailer Towing — Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
䡵 Recreational Towing — 4–Wheel Drive Vehicles
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
▫ Recreational Towing Procedure — Manual Shift
Transfer Case — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
䡵 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
䡵 Equipment Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ Returning To Normal Operation — Manual Shift
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
5
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
Axle Locker System
Dodge Power Wagons are equipped with electronically
locking front and rear axles. Locking the axles provides
greater traction in severe low traction conditions or in
rock climbing environments where one wheel is likely to
not be in contact with the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is stuck
and the tires are spinning. You can damage drivetrain components. Lock the rear axle before attempting situations or navigating terrain, which
could possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck.
CAUTION!
Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard surfaced
roads. The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced and
damage to the drivetrain may occur when the axles
are locked on hard surfaced roads.
The locking axles are controlled by the axle locker switch
located on the center console.
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
NOTE: Even when the axles are in the UNLOCK
position, the limited slip differential in the rear axle still
provides torque biasing capability for moderate low
traction environments.
During the command to lock the axle, the indicator light
will flash until the axle is locked. After the lock command
has been successfully executed, the light will remain on
solid.
Rotary Locking Axle Switch
The switch has three positions, UNLOCK, RR, and FR/
RR. Under normal driving conditions the switch should
be left in the UNLOCK position. In the UNLOCK position, the front and rear axles are unlocked. In the RR
position, the rear axle is locked. In the FR/RR position,
the front and rear axles are locked.
To lock the rear axle, place the vehicle in 4LO by
following the procedure in Four Wheel Drive Operation,
located in this section of the manual. Move the axle
locker switch position to RR while traveling less than 3
MPH (5 KM/H). The RR indicator light will remain on
when the rear axle is locked.
5
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Left to right wheel speed difference may be
necessary to allow the axle to fully lock. If the indicator
light is flashing after placing the switch in the RR or
FR/RR position, drive the vehicle in a turn or on loose
gravel to expedite the locking action.
NOTE: The rear axle must be locked before the front
axle will lock.
WARNING!
NOTE: The axle lockers could be torque locked due to
side to side loads on the axle. Driving slowly while
turning the steering wheel from a left hand turn to a right
hand turn or driving in reverse for a short distance may
be required to release the torque lock and unlock the
axles.
Do not use the locked axle position for normal
driving. A locked front axle is intended for off-road
driving only. Locking the front axle during on-road
driving will reduce the steering ability. This could
cause an accident and you may be seriously injured.
To lock the front axle move the axle locker switch to
FR/RR while traveling less than 3 MPH (5 KM/H). The
indicator light will be solid when the front axle is locked.
To unlock the front axle move the axle locker switch to
RR. The FR/RR indicator light will go out when the axle
is unlocked.
To unlock the rear axle move the axle locker switch to
UNLOCK. The RR indicator light will go out when the
rear axle is unlocked.
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
Stabilizer/Sway Bar System
Power Wagon vehicles are equipped with an electronic
disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows
greater front suspension travel in off-road situations.
The switch has two positions, on-road and off-road. The
system is normally in on-road mode, indicated by a solid
green light. The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in
on-road mode during normal driving conditions.
This system is controlled by the electronic control sway
bar switch located on the instrument panel.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4HI
or 4LO as shown in Four Wheel Drive Operation and
press the top of the stabilizer/sway bar button to obtain
the off-road position. The amber indicator light will flash
until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully disconnected.
(See page 277 for more information.)
Electronic Control Sway Bar Switch
NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked
due to left and right suspension height differences. This
condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle
loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to
disconnect/reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar
must be aligned. This alignment may require that the
vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side
to side.
5
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
To return to on-road mode press the bottom of the
stabilizer/sway bar button.
WARNING!
If stabilizer/sway bar will not return to on-road
mode, vehicle stability is greatly reduced. Do not
attempt to drive vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h).
Driving faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) may cause loss
of control of the vehicle, which could result in
serious injury. Contact your local service center for
assistance.
POWER WAGON – SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING
Off-Road Driving Tips and Vehicle Characteristics
The Power Wagon has excellent on and off-road capabilities. These off-road capabilities will allow you to explore
those wilderness trails where few travel, providing a
source of exciting and satisfying recreation. Before you
venture out you should contact your local governmental
agency to determine what are the designated off-road
vehicle (ORV) trails or recreation areas. You should
always tread lightly and only use established roads, trails
or ORV recreational areas. The National Forest Service,
Bureau of Land Management or local Department of
Natural Resources are a wealth of information and usually have maps with marked trails.
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
Ramp Travel Index (RTI)
The ramp travel index is the distance, in inches, that you
can drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20-degree
ramp without lifting any other wheel off the ground. This
distance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of the
vehicle and multiplied by 1000 is the RTI. The Power
Wagon has an RTI of 655, which means you can articulate
one front wheel 32 inches in the air while the other three
wheels remain in contact with the ground.
High Mobility Characteristics
The Power Wagon has high off-road mobility characteristics with an approach angle A= 35 degrees, a break-over
angle B= 25.5 degrees, a running ground clearance C=
14.5 inches, a departure angle D= 26.5 degrees, an axle to
ground clearance E= 8.4 inches front/E= 8.25 rear and
has a ramp travel index (with the smart bar in off-road
mode) of 655. Also the Power Wagon has a grade-ability
of a 60% (31 degree) slope.
5
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
Angles A, B, C, and D
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
5
Water Fording
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
Water Fording Characteristics
Water fording characteristic is the vehicle’s ability to
cross a body of still water, where the powertrain and
drivetrain are safe from water ingestion. The Power
Wagon has high water fording characteristics with the
ability to cross a pool of water, without stopping, 24
inches deep at a maximum speed of 10 mph and a pool of
water 30 inches deep at a maximum speed of 5 mph, both
with an entrance ramp angle of 1.3 degrees.
CAUTION!
The door sill height is 25 inches. Water may intrude
into the interior of the vehicle at greater depths.
Front and Rear (Shown) Differential Height E
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous use of the brake and throttle (two footed driving).
When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects,
using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the
vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also
used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a
steep incline.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving offroad. You should be familiar with the terrain and area
before proceeding. There are many types of surface
conditions: hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,
mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on
your vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road
driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel
and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden
accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases there are no
road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore
you will need to use your own good judgment on what is
safe and what isn’t. When on a trail you should always be
looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while
remembering what you are currently driving over.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
exhaust system could cause a fire.
5
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an
off-road situation.
When To Use Low Range
When driving off-road, shift into 4L (Low range) for
additional traction or to improve handling and control on
slippery or difficult terrain. Due to the lower gearing, low
range will allow the engine to operate in a higher power
range. This will allow you to idle over obstacles and
down hills, with improved control and less effort. Also,
use 4L (Low range) in rain, ice, snow, mud, sand, to get
heavy loads rolling, improve traction, or whenever 4H
(High range) traction will not do the job.
Driving in Snow, Mud and Sand
There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in
snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to
steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore you
should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances
and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a
slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the
vehicle’s momentum.
• Snow – In heavy snow or for additional control and
traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a
low gear and shift the transfer case to 4L (Low) if
necessary. Don’t shift to a lower gear than necessary to
maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin
the wheels and traction will be lost. If you start to slow
to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than
a 1⁄4 turn quickly back and forth, while still applying
throttle. This will allow the tires to get a fresh ⬙bite⬙
and help maintain your momentum.
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine rpm’s or vehicle speeds because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
• Mud – Deep mud creates a great deal of suction
around the tires and is very difficult to get through.
You should use 4L (low range) with a gear low enough
to maintain your momentum without shifting. If you
start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel
no more than a 1⁄4 turn quickly back and forth for
additional traction. Mud holes pose an increased
threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck. They are
normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting
stuck. As a good practice before entering any mud
hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if there are
any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely
recovered if stuck.
• Sand – Soft sand is very difficult to travel through
with full tire pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots
in a trail maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do
not stop. The key to driving in soft sand is to use the
appropriate tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle’s
momentum. If you are going to be driving on large soft
sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a
minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire
surface area. Reduced tire pressure will drastically
improve your traction and handling, while driving on
the soft sand, but you must return the tires to normal
air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard
surfaces. Be sure you have a way to air the tires back
up prior to reducing the pressure.
5
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your
speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to loose control of
your vehicle.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
Points)
While driving off road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different
types of obstacles. Before proceeding review the path
ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability
to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.
Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the
vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle
forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the
throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and
ease the vehicle up and over the object.
Using A Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle
or determine the correct path. Determining the correct
path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting
many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you
over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see
the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and
guide you through.
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which
ensures you drive over the largest of them with your
tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle.
The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side
wall and is designed to take the abuse. Always look
ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with
your tires.
CAUTION!
Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough
to strike your axles or undercarriage.
CAUTION!
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large
rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your
vehicle’s mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle
independently. You need to use caution when crossing
large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross
any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great
enough to put the vehicle at risk of a roll over. If you get
caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed
dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created.
You should now be able to drive out following the trench
you just created at a 45-degree angle.
5
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
There is an increased risk of roll over when crossing
an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
Do not attempted to cross a log with a greater
diameter than the running ground clearance or the
vehicle will become high centered.
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be
on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the
log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and
accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your
tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
Getting High Centered
If you get hung up or high centered on an object, get out
of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is
hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and
what is the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up
and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off
of the high point when you let the vehicle down. You can
also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off
the object.
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good understanding of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep
to climb and should not be attempted. You should always
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You
should always climb hills straight up and down. Never
attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
• Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach a
hill consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is
too steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill
side trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is on
top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches
or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover
the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything
looks good and you feel confident, then change transmission into a lower gear, shift the transfer case into 4L
(Low) and proceed with caution. You should use first
gear and 4L (Low) for very steep hills.
• Driving Up Hill – Once you have determined your
ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest
possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant throttle
and apply more power as you start up the hill. Do not
race forward into a steep grade, the abrupt change of
grade could cause you to lose control. If the front end
begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring
all four tires back on the ground. As you approach the
crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed
over the top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach
the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain
headway by turning the steering wheel no more than
5
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
a 1⁄4 turn quickly back and forth. This will provide a
fresh ⬙bite⬙ into the surface and will usually provide
enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not
make it to the top, place the vehicle in reverse and
back straight down the grade using engine resistance
along with the vehicle brakes.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline
increases the risk of a roll over, which may result in
severe injury.
• Driving Down Hill – Before driving down a steep hill
you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe
descent. What is the surface traction? Is the grade too
steep to maintain a slow controlled descent? Are there
obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of
distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the
vehicle descends to fast? If you feel confident in your
ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4L (Low)
with the transmission in 1st gear (manually select 1st
gear on automatic transmissions) and proceed with
caution. Allow engine braking to control the descent
and apply your brakes if necessary, but do not allow
the tires to lock.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in neutral. Use vehicle
brakes in conjunction with engine braking. Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured.
• Driving Across An Incline – If at all possible avoid
driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your
vehicle’s abilities. Driving across an incline places
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
more weight on the down hill wheels, which increases
the possibilities of a down hill slide or roll over. Make
sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable
soils. If possible transverse the incline at an angle
heading slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a roll
over, which may result in severe injury.
• If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you stall
or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill,
allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately
apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift to R
(Reverse). Back slowly down the hill allowing the
compression braking of the engine and transmission to
help regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to
control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid
locking or skidding the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle, which may result in
severe injury. Always back carefully straight down a
hill in R (Reverse) gear. Never back down a hill in N
(Neutral) or with the clutch pedal depressed using
only the vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally
across a hill, always drive straight up or down.
5
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be
attempted when necessary, in a safe responsible manner.
You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved. You should tread lightly and avoid
damage to the environment. You should know your
vehicles abilities and be able to recover it if something
goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a vehicle off
when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into
the engine air intake. If the engine stalls do not attempt to
restart it. Determine if it has ingested water first. The key
to any crossing is low and slow. You want to use 1st gear
in 4L (low) and proceed very slowly with a constant slow
speed (3-5 mph maximum) and light throttle. Keep the
vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through the
crossing. After crossing any water higher than the bottom
of the axle differentials, you should inspect all of the
vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion.
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer
case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive
too fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause
permanent damage to engine, driveline or other
vehicle components and your brakes will be less
effective once wet and/or muddy
• Before You Cross Any Type Of Water – As you
approach any type of water you need to determine if
you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get
out and walk through the water or probe it with a
stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle,
current and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or
muddy waters, check for hidden obstacles. Make sure
you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can
recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
crossing is the water depth, current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in,
effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be
sure to consider this when determining the depth and
the ability to safely cross.
• Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other
Standing Water – Puddles, pools, flooded or other
standing water areas normally contain murky or
muddy waters. These water types normally contain
hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an
accurate water depth, approach angle, and bottom
condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where
you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This
makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery.
If you are able to determine you can safely cross, than
proceed using the low and slow method.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
• Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other
Flowing Water – Flowing water can be extremely
dangerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running
stream or river even in shallow water. Fast moving
water can easily push your vehicle downstream
sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow water,
a high current can still wash the dirt out from around
your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy.
There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle
damage with slower water currents in depths greater
than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. You
should never attempt to cross flowing water which is
deeper than the vehicle’s running ground clearance.
Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle
5
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
downstream out of control if the water is deep enough
to push on the large surface area of the vehicle’s body.
Before you proceed determine the speed of the current,
the water’s depth, approach angle, bottom condition
and if there are any obstacles, then cross at an angle
heading slightly upstream using the low and slow
technique.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can
push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of
control. This could put you and your passengers at
risk of injury or drowning.
Airing Down For Off-Road Driving
Running lower tire pressure off-road can improve your
ride comfort and vehicle traction. Reducing the tire air
pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly, improving its
surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or
form to the ground contour. Different terrain, tires, and
vehicles require different tire pressure. Hard surfaces like
rock and heavier vehicles require higher pressures than
softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles. You will
need to experiment to determine what is right for your
situation. It is easier and faster to let air out than it is to
replace it so, start high and lower it as required. Remember you must return the tires to normal air pressure
before driving on road or at highway conditions. Be sure
you have a way to return the tires to their normal on road
air pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire damage and may cause tire unseating with total loss of
air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire unseating,
while at a reduced tire pressure, drive at slower
speeds and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Vehicle Recovery
If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation
where you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehicle
recovery should always be given consideration before
attempting a questionable obstacle. You should never go
off-road driving without the ability to recover your
vehicle from a situation. Having another vehicle with
you usually works best for most situations. The first
thing to do is assess the situation. Why are you stuck?
Are you hung up on something? Would it be easier to go
forward or to go backward? Can you still move the
vehicle? Is there an anchor point to winch to? Are you
alone or do you have another vehicle to help? Is there
high risk of vehicle damage during the recovery process?
Answering these questions will help you determine the
best method of recovery. If you can still move the vehicle
slightly and the only issue is slick ground, then rock
cycling your vehicle would be the first choice. If you have
ample room, an additional vehicle and there is low risk of
vehicle impingement on the surroundings, then using a
tow strap to the vehicle tow hooks would be fast and
easy. If the vehicle is severely hung up or in a situation
where great care needs to be taken during the recovery,
then nothing can do the job better than a winch. If you are
severely hung up on something you should jack the
vehicle up and stack something under the wheels to
allow the vehicle to roll off the object without causing
further damage. This should be tried before attempting
any recovery method.
5
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without first
clearing the object, may result in additional underbody damage.
• Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your vehicle is one of the easiest, fastest and most commonly
used methods. This simply involves shifting your
vehicle from drive to reverse, while applying throttle
after each shift. During this process, for additional
traction, try turning your steering wheel quickly back
and forth no more than a 1⁄4 turn. If you are stuck in
mud, sand, or snow try spinning your tires during this
process to clean the debris from the tread and improve
the traction. You want to create a rocking motion with
the vehicle. This helps build vehicle momentum,
which hopefully gets you out. Remember to ease off
and on the accelerator before and after the shift. If after
a few rock cycles your vehicle is not free, stop and try
another method of recovery. Continuous rock cycling
will only cause unnecessary damage to your vehicle
and the environment.
CAUTION!
Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an
excessive high speed. Do not spin your tires faster
than an indicated 35 mph
• Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap – Tow
straps are a quick and easy way to recover your
vehicle from minor situations if you have a secondary
vehicle which is not stuck. The tow hooks on your
vehicle are designed to take the abusive force generated during vehicle recovery. Do not use the bumper
or any other vehicle component as an attachment
point. Using tow straps requires coordination between
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
the two drivers. Good communication and line of sight
are required for a safe recovery. First connect the tow
strap to the correct attachment points on both vehicles.
There should be a least 20 to 30 feet between the
vehicles to allow for a safe recovery. If necessary join
two tow straps together using a 1 1⁄2 inch hard wood
dowel. This will keep the straps from becoming knotted and is safer than using a clevis pin if the strap
breaks. Next have the tow vehicle backup, leaving 2 to
3 feet worth of slack in the strap. Then the tow vehicle,
using light throttle, should accelerate tightening the
strap providing the pulling force needed to free the
vehicle. The vehicle being recovered should assist in
the recovery, at the time of the snap, by slowly
spinning the tires in the same direction as the pulling
vehicle. After the vehicle becomes free, the driver of
the previously stuck vehicle should signal they are free
and should hit their brakes stopping both vehicles.
The driver of the pulling vehicle should let off the
throttle without using the brakes, once signaled by the
other driver. This sequence is important to avoid
having the recovered vehicle hit the pulling vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two
straps with a clevis pin. These heavy metal objects
could become projectiles if a strap breaks, which
could cause severe injury. Never leave more than 2 or
3 feet of slack in the strap. More slack than this
greatly increases the risk of injury and vehicle damage. Always keep everyone at least 30 feet away from
a strapping or winching situation.
5
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Winching (see the section on “Winch Operation” for
additional information on the Power Wagon’s winch)
– Winching is most commonly used in the following
situations: there is no support vehicle available, a high
controlled force is required to recover the vehicle,
there is a high risk of environmental or vehicle damage, or where nothing else seemed to work. A winch
can deliver a high pulling force with a great deal of
control. It allows you to walk the vehicle out of the
situation in a slow controlled manor. This control
works well for avoiding further vehicle damage. Once
you decide it is time to use the winch look for a good
anchor point. It needs to be strong enough to hold
more than the vehicle’s weight and provide a direction
of pull as straight as possible. Use block and tackle if
necessary to improve the angle of pull or increase the
winch’s pulling force. If the anchor point is a tree use
a strap around its base and hook the cable to the strap.
If it is another vehicle, then place that vehicle in park
and block the front tires. If you cannot find an anchor
point within reach try using your spare tire by burying
it. Once you have determined an anchor point hook up
the cable, ensuring there are a least five wraps of cable
left on the drum, and place a floor mat or something
else over the strung out cable. Placing something over
the strung out cable helps keep the cable on the
ground if it breaks. Next, place the vehicle in 1st gear
and apply a very light throttle as you power the winch
in. Be careful not to allow slack in the cable as you
recover the vehicle. Do not try to guide the cable into
the drum. If it starts to bunch up on one end, let it. You
can re-spool the cable afterwards. Never use a winch
cable as a tow strap and always stand back while
winching.
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
WARNING!
Winch cables are under high tension when in use
and can become a projectile if they fail. Never stand
over or straddle the winch cable. Never jerk or
overload the winch cable. Never stand in front of the
vehicle while winching. Failure to follow these instructions can result in serious or fatal injury.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After driving off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard, or they might hide
damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals,
and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have brake drums and rotors,
brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as
soon as possible.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
packed material. Packed foreign material can cause a
wheel imbalance and cleaning the wheels will correct
the situation.
5
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You
might not have full braking power when you need it
to prevent an accident. If you have been operating
your vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes
checked and cleaned as necessary. Failure to do so
may result is serious injury.
high forces and should be used with care. Do not operate
the winch without reading and understanding the complete winch owner’s manual.
Tensioning the Wire Rope
The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use.
Follow the instructions below to tension the rope:
1. Un-spool the wire rope leaving 5 wraps of rope on the
winch drum.
2. Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point.
WINCH USAGE
Things To Know Before Using Your Winch
General Winch Information
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery
winch. This winch uses the electrical power from the
vehicle charging system to power a motor that winds
wire rope into the winch drum via planetary gear reduction. By nature, a winch is capable of generating very
CAUTION!
Be certain the anchor will withstand the load required to tension the wire rope.
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
3. Apply at least 500 lbs. of tension to the rope while
winding the rope in. Always use care to ensure the rope
does not pile up on one side of the drum and is neatly
wound onto the drum.
CAUTION!
Wire rope must spool on the winch drum in the
direction indicated on the drum rotation decal on the
winch.
Low Voltage Interrupt
Your winch is equipped with a device that will interrupt
winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage
drops to a low level. The winch will not power-in or out
for 30 seconds if this device is tripped. If the interrupt is
tripped, the vehicle should be operated at high idle for a
few minutes to allow the vehicle charging system to
recover before continuing to winch.
Winch Motor Thermal Protection
Your winch is equipped with a thermal protection device
in the motor. If the winch is operated for an excessive
duration, the device may interrupt motor function to
protect the winch motor. During this time the winch will
power-out but will not power-in. Allow the winch motor
to cool for a few minutes before continuing to winch. The
winch will resume normal function once the motor cools.
5
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR WINCH
Winch Components
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
1. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the vehicle
charging system and features a thermal protection switch
that automatically stops motor function in the power-in
direction if the motor gets too hot.
2. Remote Socket: The remote socket allows the remote
control to be attached to the control pack to allow the
winch to function.
3. Winch Drum w/ Integral Brake: The winch drum
allows the wire rope to be stored on the winch and
transmits force to the wire rope. The winch is equipped
with an integral brake that will stop rotation of the winch
drum if the winch motor is stopped.
4. 3 Stage Planetary Gear Set: Provides balance between
speed and pulling power.
5. Wire Rope: The wire rope allows the winch to be
connected to an anchor to provide a pulling force.
6. Clutch Lever: The clutch lever allows the winch drum
to be disconnected from the winch motor to allow the
wire rope to be pulled from the winch by hand.
7. Remote Control: The remote control provides the
interface between the winch operator and the winch. The
remote control provides the ability to power the winch in,
out, and stop the winch. To operate the winch, the toggle
switch is pressed down to power the winch in and up to
power the winch out. The winch will stop if the switch is
left in the neutral (center) position.
CAUTION!
If not installed, the hook strap must be placed on the
hook.
Fairlead: The fairlead acts as a guide for the wire rope
and minimizes damage to the rope.
5
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
WINCH ACCESSORIES
The following accessories are necessary to attach the
winch to anchors, change direction of pull, and for safe
winching.
Gloves: Wire rope, through
use, will develop ⬙barbs⬙
which can slice skin. It is extremely important to wear
protective gloves while operating the winch or handling
the wire rope. Avoid loose fitting clothes or anything that
could become entangled in
the wire rope and other moving parts.
Snatch/Block Pulley: Used
properly, the multi-purpose
snatch block allows you to (1)
increase our winch’s pulling
power; and (2) change your
pulling direction without
damaging the wire rope.
Proper use of the snatch block
is covered in ⬙Before You
Pull.⬙
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
Clevis/D-Shackles:
The
D-Shackle is a safe means of
connecting the looped ends of
cables, straps and snatch
blocks. The shackle’s pin is
threaded to allow easy removal.
Tree Trunk Protector: Typically made of tough, highquality nylon, it provides the
operator an attachment point
for the winch rope to a wide
variety of anchor points and
objects, as well as protect living trees.
OPERATING YOUR WINCH
WARNING!
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Always use supplied hook strap to hold hook when spooling wire rope in or out.
Never use as a hoist.
Never use to move persons.
Never exceed winch or wire rope rated capacity.
Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling the wire rope.
Never touch wire rope or hook while in tension or under load.
Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is under load, wire rope is in tension, or wire
rope drum is moving.
● Always stand clear of wire rope and load and keep others away during winching.
● Always keep hands and clothing clear of the wire rope, hook and fairlead opening
during operation and when spooling.
● Never wrap wire rope back onto itself. Always use a choker chain, wire choker rope or
tree trunk protector on the anchor.
● Never attach a recovery strap to the winch hook to increase the length of a pull.
● Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovery strap attached directly to the winch
hook.
● Never use ⴖbungeeⴖ straps that develop tremendous and potentially dangerous amounts
of force when stretched.
● Always disconnect the remote control when not in use.
● Never winch when there are less than 5 wraps of wire rope around the winch drum.
● Always pass remote control through a window to avoid pinching lead in door, then
using remote inside a vehicle.
● Never leave the remote control plugged into the winch while free spooling, rigging or
sitting idle.
Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding proper winch usage may result in
severe injury.
5
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
Practice using your winch before you get stuck. Some key
points to remember when using your winch are:
1. Always take your time to assess the situation and plan
your pull carefully.
Vehicle Recovery Using the Winch:
CAUTION!
• Always Know Your Winch: Take time to fully read
2. Always take your time when using a winch.
3. Use the right equipment for the situation.
4. Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the wire
rope to slip through your hands when handling the rope.
5. Only the operator should handle the wire rope and
remote control.
•
•
6. Think safety at all times.
•
•
and understand the included Installation and Operations Guide, and Basic Guide to Winching Techniques, in order to understand your winch and the
winching operation.
Always inspect winch installation and wire rope
condition before operating winch. Frayed, kinked or
damaged wire rope must be replaced immediately.
Loose or damaged winch installation must be corrected immediately.
Always be sure any element which can interfere with
safe winching operations is removed prior to initiating winching.
Always keep remote control lead clear of the drum,
wire rope and rigging.
Inspect for cracks, pinches, frayed wires, or loose
connections. Replace if damaged.
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
CAUTION!
Be careful not to pull the Winch Cable Collar
through the rollers. Watch and listen to Winch for
proper snugness.
1. Inspect the winch, winch mount, and wire rope for
damage. Do not use the winch if the mount is loose or
rope shows excessive wear or damage.
2. Put on gloves.
5
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Disengage clutch to allow free spooling of the winch
drum, rotate the clutch lever on the winch to disengage.
Freespooling conserves battery power.
4. Free the winch hook and attach hook strap. Free the
winch hook from its anchor point. Attach hook strap to
the hook (if not attached).
Free Spool
Hook Strap
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
5. Pull wire to anchor point. Pull out enough wire rope to
reach your anchor point. Be sure to keep a certain amount
of tension on the wire as it can become twisted and
over-wrap when slackened, leading to wire rope damage.
To prevent losing the end, hold the hook strap while you
work.
6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you’ve established
your anchor point, secure the tree-trunk protector or
choker-chain around the object.
5
Tree Trunk Protector
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Always be certain the anchor you select will withstand the load.
NOTE:
How to choose an anchor point: A secure
anchor is critical to winching operations. An anchor must
be strong enough to hold while winching. Natural anchors include trees, stumps and rocks. Hook the cable as
low as possible. If no natural anchors are available when
recovering another vehicle, your vehicle becomes the
anchor point. In this case, be sure to put the transmission
in neutral, apply the hand brake and block its wheels to
prevent your vehicle from moving. Ideally, you’ll want
an anchor point that will enable you to pull straight in the
direction the vehicle will move. This allows the wire rope
to wind tightly and evenly onto the spooling drum. An
anchor point as far away as possible will provide the
winch with its greatest pulling power.
7. Attach the Clevis/D-shackle and Tree Trunk Protector.
Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap or chain
and through the hook loop, being careful not to over
tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
Clevis/D-Shackles
8. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by rotating the
clutch lever on the winch to engage.
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
NOTE: Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or
disengaged.
9. Connect the remote control to the winch control box,
located behind the front bumper. Be careful not to let the
remote control cord dangle in front of the winch. If you
choose to control the winch from inside your vehicle,
always pass the remote through a window to avoid
pinching the cord in the door. Always disconnect the
remote control when not in use.
5
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
10. Put wire rope under tension. Using the remote control switch, slowly wind the wire rope until no slack
remains. Once the wire rope is under tension, stand well
clear and never step over it.
11. Check your anchor. Make sure all connections are
secured and free of debris before continuing with the
winching procedure.
12. Check wire rope. The wire rope should be neatly
wound around the spooling drum. Improper winding
can cause damage to the wire rope.
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
13. In certain situations you
may decide to throw a heavy
blanket or similar object over
the wire rope. A heavy blanket can absorb energy should
the wire rope break. Place it
on the wire rope midway between the winch and the anchor point. Do this before the
wire rope is put under tension. Do not approach or move the blanket once tension
is applied. Do not allow it to get pulled into the fairlead.
If necessary to move or remove the blanket, slack the
tension on the wire rope first.
14. Establish ⴖno peopleⴖ zones: Make your intentions
clear. Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinity
surrounding the winching operation is completely aware
of your intentions before you pull. Declare where the
spectators should not stand - never behind or in front of
the vehicle and never near the wire rope or snatch
block. Your situation may have other ⴖno peopleⴖ zones.
5
No People Zones
15. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles engine
on and light tension already on the wire rope, begin
winching slowly and steadily. Be sure that the wire rope
is winding evenly and tightly around the spooling drum.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
For additional assistance, the winched vehicle can be
slowly driven while being pulled by the winch. Continue
pulling until the vehicle is on stable ground. If you are
able to drive the vehicle, the winching operation is
complete.
Using The Remote Control
NOTE: Avoid overheating the winch motor. For extended winching, stop at reasonable intervals to allow
the winch motor to cool down.
NOTE: What to look for under load: The wire rope
must always spool onto the drum as indicated by the
drum rotation decal on the winch. As you power-in,
make sure the wire rope winds evenly and tightly on the
drum. This prevents the outer wire wraps from drawing
into the inner wraps, binding and damaging the wire
rope. Avoid shock loads by using the control switch
intermittently to take up wire rope slack. Shock loads can
momentarily far exceed the winch and wire rope ratings.
During side pulls the wire rope tends to stack up at one
end of the drum. This stack can become large enough to
cause serious damage to the winch. So, line up pulls as
straight ahead as possible and stop winching if the wire
rope comes close to the tie rods or mounting plate. To fix
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
an uneven stack, spool out that section of the rope and
reposition it to the opposite end of the drum, which will
free up space for continued winching.
16. Secure vehicle. Once recovery of the vehicle is complete, be sure to secure the vehicle’s brakes and put the
transmission in ⬙park⬙ (automatic) or ⬙low⬙ gear for
⬙manual⬙ transmissions. Release tension in the wire rope.
17. Disconnect wire rope. Disconnect from the anchor.
18. Rewind wire rope. The person handling the wire
rope should walk the rope in and not let it slide through
the hand, control the winch at all times.
5
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury, NEVER put your fingers
inside the hook area as you are powering-in.
NOTE: How to spool under no load: Arrange the
remote control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
Arrange the wire rope so it will not kink or tangle when
spooled. Be sure any wire rope already on the spooling
drum is wound tightly and evenly layered. Tighten and
straighten the layer if necessary. Keep the wire rope
under light tension and spool the wire rope back and
onto the winch drum in even layers. Stop frequently to
tighten and straighten the layers as necessary. Repeat this
process until the winch hook is the same distance as the
full length of the remote control from the winch. Pinch
the hook between your thumb and forefinger and attach
the hook strap. Hold the hook strap between the thumb
and forefinger to keep tension on the wire rope. Walk the
wire rope towards the fairlead, carefully spooling in the
remaining wire rope. By pulsing the remote control
switch.
19. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the tow
hook.
20. Disconnect remote control. Disconnect the remote
control cord from the control box and store in a clean and
dry place. Winching operations are now complete. Put
the cap on the solenoid plug-in.
NOTE: Always store the remote control in a protected,
clean, dry area.
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
RIGGING TECHNIQUES
How to change the pulling direction:
Various winching situations will require application of
other winching techniques. These could range from too
little distance to achieve maximum pull using straight
line rigging, simply increasing pulling power, or maintaining a straight-line pulling situation. You will have to
assess what technique is correct for your situation. Think
⬙safety⬙ at all times.
5
Change Pulling Directions
All winching operations should have a straight line from
the winch to the object being pulled. This minimizes the
wire rope collecting on one side of the drum affecting
pulling efficiency and damaging wire rope. A snatch
block, secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
will enable you to change your pulling direction while
still allowing the wire rope to be at 90° to wind properly
onto the spooling drum.
Increasing pulling power:
Increase Pulling Power
In some cases, you may find yourself needing more
pulling power. The use of snatch blocks increases mechanical advantage and that increases your pulling
power:
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
Double Line:
Because pulling power decreases with the number of
layers of wire rope on the winch drum, you can use a
snatch block to double line out more wire rope. This
decreases the number of layers of wire rope on the drum,
and increases pulling power. Start by feeding out enough
wire rope to free the winch hook. Attach the hook to your
vehicle’s frame/tow hook and run the wire rope through
a snatch block. Disengage the clutch and, using the
snatch block, pull out enough wire to reach your anchor
point. Do not attach hook to mounting kit. Secure to the
anchor point with a tree trunk protector or choker chain.
Attach the clevis/shackle. Attach the shackle to the two
ends of the strap/chain, being careful not to over tighten
(tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
5
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
IGNITION/STARTER SWITCH
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
depressed to shift out of Park (P).
OFF
Unlocks the steering wheel (if equipped with locking
wheel) and the automatic transmission shift control with
engine off.
ON
This is the normal running position.
LOCK
Locks the automatic transmission shift control into the
PARK position. It also engages the steering wheel lock (if
equipped) when the steering wheel is turned.
START
Starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key.
The ignition key will return to the ON position for
normal driving.
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
ACC
Allows the electrical accessories to be used when the
engine is not running.
Key Reminder
An alarm will sound to remind you if the key is left in the
ignition and the driver’s door is opened.
Manual Transmission Key Release Button
STARTING PROCEDURES
The starter should not be operated for more than 15second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such
intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
Manual Transmission
Apply the parking brake, place the gearshift control lever
in NEUTRAL and depress the clutch pedal to the floor
before starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with
a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start
unless the clutch is fully depressed.
To remove the key on vehicles equipped with manual
transmissions, turn the key to the Lock position and press
the button to remove the ignition key.
5
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the selector lever in NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting of either a warm or cold engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key to the START position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
10 seconds, turn the key to the OFF position, wait 5
seconds, then repeat the starting procedure.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
depressed to shift out of Park (P).
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
normal starting procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there
while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15–seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
smoothly.
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the normal starting procedure should be
repeated.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
After Starting
The idle speed is automatically controlled and will decrease as the engine warms up.
CAUTION!
Long periods of engine idling, especially at high
engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust temperatures which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave
your vehicle unattended with the engine running.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
5
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRANSMISSION SHIFTING
Automatic Transmission with Overdrive
The gear shift selector display, located in the instrument
panel cluster, indicates the transmission gear range (the
selector is illuminated for night driving). The selector
lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column.
You must depress the brake pedal, to pull the selector
lever out of park (P) position (Brake Interlock System). To
drive, move the selector lever from Park or Neutral to the
desired drive position. Pull the selector lever toward you
when shifting into Reverse, Second, First or Park, or
when shifting out of Park.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Park or
Neutral position into another gear range.
“P” Park
This gear position supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in
this range. Never use Park while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range. Always apply parking brake first, then place the
selector in Park position. On 4-wheel-drive vehicles be
sure that the transfer case is in a drive position!
WARNING!
Never use Park position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
WARNING!
WARNING!
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not completely in P (Park). Check by trying to
move the gearshift lever back and forth without first
pulling it toward you after you have set it in P. Make
sure it is in Park before leaving the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
“R” Reverse
Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
5
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
“N” Neutral
Shift to Neutral when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may
be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
leave the vehicle.
“D” Drive
This position provides all forward gears, including 3rd
gear direct and 4th or 5th (if equipped) gear overdrive
(see Overdrive Operation). Use this range for most city
and highway driving.
“2” Second
Use this position for driving slowly in heavy city traffic
or on mountain roads where more precise speed control
is desirable. Use it also when climbing long grades, and
for engine braking when descending moderately steep
grades.
NOTE: Do not exceed maximum engine speed.
“1” First
Use this position for driving up very steep hills and for
engine braking at low speeds (20 mph [32 km/h] or less)
when going downhill.
NOTE: Do not exceed maximum engine speed.
Overdrive Operation
The overdrive automatic transmission contains an electronically controlled fourth and fifth (if equipped) speed
(Overdrive). The transmission will automatically shift
from Drive to Overdrive if the following conditions are
present:
• the transmission selector is in Drive;
• the engine coolant has reached normal operating temperature;
• vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48
km/h);
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
• the “TOW/HAUL” switch has not been activated;
• transmission has reached normal operating temperature.
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive
and will automatically select the most desirable gear for
operation at this temperature. Normal operation will
resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under
torque converter clutch, later in this section.
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough the TRANS TEMP light
may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out
of Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After
cooldown, the transmission will resume normal operation.
The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive
if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle
speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
When To Use “TOW/HAUL” Mode
5
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the “TOW/HAUL” button. This will improve
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
performance and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When
operating in “TOW/HAUL” mode, 5th gear (if
equipped) is disabled and 2-3 and 3-4 shift patterns are
modified. Shifts into Overdrive (4th gear) are allowed
during steady cruise (for improved fuel economy) and
automatic closed-throttle downshifts to 3rd gear (for
improved braking) will occur during steady braking.
The “TOW/HAUL” light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been
activated. Pressing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. If the “TOW/HAUL” mode is desired,
the button must be pressed each time the engine is
started.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature, designed to improve fuel economy, has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
high gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during
acceleration when the transmission downshifts to second
gear, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1-3 miles (1.6 - 4.8 km) of driving]. Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Pressing the “TOW/HAUL” button, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
transmission is able to shift into and out of overdrive.
NOTE: If the vehicle has not been driven in several
days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the
transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into
any other gear position.
G 56 Shift Pattern
– If Equipped
Manual Transmission — 6-Speed
NOTE: The parking brake should be engaged before
leaving the vehicle, especially on an incline.
This model is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. The clutch pedal must be fully depressed to
start the vehicle.
Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelerator pedal. When launching a stationary vehicle, keep the
engine speed low until the clutch is fully engaged.
5
For improved clutch life, all six forward gears should be
used. For steady highway driving with light acceleration,
6th gear is recommended. When shifting from 4th to 5th
gear, apply side effort away and forward without pushing hard enough to engage Reverse gear. Shifting from
5th to 6th requires the same side effort or the lever will
return to center resulting in a shift into 4th gear and
damage the transmission, clutch, or engine.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
You should use low gear when starting from a standing
position if under a heavy load.
To shift into Reverse, come to a complete stop. Depress
the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to
stop. Move the shift lever from the Neutral position
straight across and up into Reverse.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on
the clutch.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transmission for fuel economy it
should be upshifted as listed below. Shift at the vehicle
speeds listed for acceleration. Earlier upshifts during
cruise conditions (relatively steady speeds) will result in
increased fuel economy, and may be used as indicated.
mph
(km/h)
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Recommended Shift Speeds
1-2
2-3
3-4
4-5
15
25
40
50
(24)
(40)
(65)
(80)
5-6
60
(97)
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
speed. To avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch,
downshift progressively and do not skip gears. For
acceleration at speeds less than 15 mph (25 km/h), 2nd
gear is recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
CAUTION!
When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the
engine which can cause valve damage.
FOUR-WHEEL- DRIVE OPERATION
Manually Shifted Transfer Case Operating
Information/Precautions
The transfer case provides 4 mode positions - 2 (rear)wheel-drive high range, 4-wheel-drive high range, neutral, and 4-wheel-drive low range.
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2-wheeldrive position (2H) for normal street and highway conditions such as dry hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required the transfer case 4H
and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear
driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by
simply moving the shift lever to the desired positions.
The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on
dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear
and damage to the driveline components.
The 4-wheel-drive light (4WD), located in the instrument
cluster, alerts the driver that the vehicle is in 4-wheel
drive and that the front and rear driveshafts are locked
together. This light illuminates when the transfer case is
shifted to either the 4H or 4L positions. There is no light
for the 2H or N (Neutral) positions.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is
approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions
at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
5
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Proper operation of 4-wheel-drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can
cause damage to the transfer case.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not
equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and
rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take
place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are
spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
Because 4-wheel drive provides improved traction, there
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position see the information below:
2H
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - Normal street and
highway driving. Dry hard surfaced roads.
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
4H
4-Wheel-Drive High Range - Locks the front and rear
driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose,
slippery road surfaces only.
Shifting Procedure - Manually Shifted Transfer
Case
N
Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more information.
4L
4-Wheel-Drive Low Range - Low speed 4-wheel-drive.
Locks the front and rear driveshafts together. Forces the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
5
2H ⇔ 4H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion,
shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage / disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator
pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant force
when shifting the transfer case lever.
2H or 4H ⇔ 4L
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
an automatic transmission to N (Neutral) or depress the
clutch on a manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer
case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in
transfer case N (Neutral).
NOTE: Pausing in transfer case N (Neutral) in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission may require
shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while
completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift automatic
transmission to N (Neutral), hold foot on brake, and turn
engine OFF. Make shift to the desired mode.
NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly
aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch
teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5
km/h).
NOTE: Do not attempt to shift to or from 4L while the
transmission is in gear or clutch is engaged.
Transfer Case Reminder Light
The four-wheel-drive operating light (4WD), located in
the instrument cluster, is used to alert the driver that the
front axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are
driving.
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL — IF EQUIPPED
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction
on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when
there is a difference between the traction characteristics
of the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During
normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs similarly to a conventional differential. On slippery surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of
the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better
traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator
will supply maximum traction. When starting with only
one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight
momentary application of the parking brake may be
necessary to gain maximum traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground, since the vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose
control of the vehicle.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could
cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to
slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a
turn.
5
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
NOTE: The instrument cluster red brake warning light
will come on and flash to indicate that the parking brake
is applied. You must be sure that the parking brake is
fully applied before leaving the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and
the gear shift lever is in the PARK position. When
parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake
before placing the gear shift lever in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the selector out of PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
WARNING!
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave an automatic
transmission in Park, a manual transmission in
Reverse or first gear. Failure to do so may allow
the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
• Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake or the gear selector
lever. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake
problems due to excessive heating of the rear
brakes.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
The parking brake should always be applied whenever
the driver is not in the vehicle.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the
brakes will still function. However, you will experience a
substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic systems lose normal
capability, the remaining system will still function with
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application,
greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation of the BRAKE warning lamp and the ABS lamp (if
equipped) during brake use.
5
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake Noise
During normal operation of the brake system certain
noises may be present from time to time. Occasional
⬙groan⬙ or ⬙squeal⬙ noises may occur during normal
operation of the brake system which may not be indicative of a problem. These noises may be heard at any time
the brakes are applied but may be more noticeable during
the first few brake applications in the morning. Moisture,
hot or cold temperature, dust, and or other debris may
also contribute to the noise condition. Repeated or continuous noises during braking may be an indication that
the brake linings are worn and in need of replacement.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)— If
Equipped
This Anti-lock Brake System is designed to aid the driver
in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking
conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel
lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation. This is
normal.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving
use of the Anti-lock Brake System, you will experience
some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake
system and is normal.
Engagement of the Anti-lock Brake System may be
accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a
clicking noise. These occurrences are normal, and indicate that the system is functioning.
ABS Warning Light
The Anti-lock Brake System includes an amber warning
light. When the light is illuminated, the Anti-lock Brake
System is not functioning. The system reverts to standard
non-anti-lock brakes.
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
WARNING!
WARNING!
Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
5
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
Your power steering system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
If for any reason the hydraulic pressure is interrupted, it
will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these
conditions you will experience a substantial increase in
steering effort.
NOTE:
• P(Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
• European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
• Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• LT(Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Tire Sizing Chart
• High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
5
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Milimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction.
—⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
EXAMPLE:
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions. (ie. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.
5
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location.(2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size.(2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer.(1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars is listed on either the face of the driver’s door
or the driver’s side “B” pillar. For vehicles other than
passenger cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed
on either the “B” pillar, the Certification Label or in the
Tire Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compartment.
5
Tire Placard Location
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire and Loading Information Placard
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of
this manual.
Tire and Loading Information
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the
Vehicle Loading section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lb.)
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
Kg).
5
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
1. Safety—
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in
tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or
left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
5
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars
is listed on either the face of the driver’s door or the
driver’s side “B” pillar. For vehicles other than passenger
cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed on either
the “B” pillar, the Certification Label or in the Tire
Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compartment.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
Tire Placard Location
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
CAUTION!
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in
the winter.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall.
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
5
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When two or more tread wear indicators
appear in adjacent grooves, the temporary use spare
tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings which apply to your spare. Failure to do so
could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle
control.
5
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on vehicle
at the first opportunity.
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
WARNING!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold
tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire
placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly.
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section
6 of this manual.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And
don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
5
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear
in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire. The
service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have an accident
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
• Fast tire wear.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
• Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
5
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION
A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passengers {150 lbs (68 kg) each} plus 200 lbs (91kg) of cargo.
Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle
will be found on a “Supplemental Tire Pressure Inflation”
label located on the face of the driver’s door or in the Tire
Information Pressures pamphlet in the glove box.
TIRE CHAINS
Use “Class U” chains on Power Wagon models, or other
traction aids that meet SAE Type “U” specifications.
NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle,
as recommended by the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other
suspension components, it is important that only chains in
good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious
vehicle damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could suggest chain breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the chain before further use.
• Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after
driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps,
especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2 vehicles.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on
method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for
usage. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of
the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacturer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
NOTE: On 4x4 Power Wagon models, class “U” snow
chains are permitted on the rear wheels only of vehicles
equipped with LT285/70R17D.
CAUTION!
Do not use tire chains on the 4X4 front wheels of
Ram Trucks equipped with LT285/70R17D. There
may not be adequate clearance for the chains and
you are risking structural or body damage to your
vehicle.
SNOW TIRES
Snow tires should be of the same size and type construction as the front tires. Consult the manufacturer of the
snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed
requirement associated with the tire. These tires should
always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity
inflation pressures under any load condition.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
5
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
NOTE: On Canadian vehicles only, if your Ram truck is
equipped with All-Season type tires on the front and
ON/OFF Road type tires mounted on the rear, do not use
a front to back rotation pattern. Instead, rotate your tires
side to side at the recommended intervals.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
The 5.7L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to 89. The manu5.7L Engines facturer recommends the use of 89 octane
for optimum performance.The routine use
of premium gasoline is not recommended. The use of
premium gasoline will provide no benefit over high
quality regular and mid-grade gasolines, and in some
circumstances may result in poorer performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers world-wide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance
and durability for your vehicle. We recommend the use
of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they
are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
5
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
We strongly support the use of reformulated gasolines.
Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide
excellent performance and durability for the engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing METHANOL.
Gasoline containing methanol may damage critical
fuel system components.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasolines
blended with MMT provide no performance advantage
beyond gasolines of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT reduce spark plug
life and reduce emission system performance. We recommend that gasolines free of MMT be used in your vehicle.
The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his/her gasoline contains
MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels
higher than allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
Sulfur In Gasoline
If you live in the northeast United States, your vehicle
may have been designed to meet California low emission
standards with Cleaner-Burning California reformulated
gasoline with low sulfur. If such fuels are not available in
states adopting California emission standards, your vehicles will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be adversely affected. Gasoline sold outside of
California is permitted to have higher sulfur levels which
may affect the performance of the vehicle’s catalytic
converter. This may cause the Check Engine or Service
Engine Soon light to illuminate. We recommend that you
try a different brand of unleaded gasoline having lower
sulfur to determine if the problem is fuel related prior to
returning your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
CAUTION!
If the Check Engine or Service Engine Soon light is
flashing, immediate service is required; see onboard
diagnostics system section.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasolines sold in the United States are required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
ADDING FUEL
NOTE: If fuel is poured from a portable container, the
container should have a flexible nozzle long enough to
extend into the fuel filler tube.
5
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle or on a
truck bed. You could be burned. Always place gas
containers on the ground while filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each
time the vehicle is refueled.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door. If the gas cap is
lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use
with this vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system.
• Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap (gas cap)
slowly to prevent fuel spray from the filler neck
which may cause injury.
• The volatility of some gasolines may cause a
buildup of pressure in the fuel tank that may
increase while you drive. This pressure can result
in a spray of gasoline and/or vapors when the cap
is removed from a hot vehicle. Removing the cap
slowly allows the pressure to vent and prevents
fuel spray.
• Never allow any lit smoking materials near the
vehicles while removing the cap or filling the
tank.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
5
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system, and could result
in loss of warranty coverage.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
• When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully loaded
vehicle when the humidity is low and the temperature
is high, use a premium unleaded fuel to help prevent
spark knock. If spark knock persists, lighten the load,
or engine piston damage may result.
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Many of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device. Under normal
operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not
require maintenance. However, you must keep the engine maintained to assure proper operation and prevent
possible damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
5
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
As with any vehicle, do not park or operate this vehicle in
areas where combustible materials such as grass or leaves
can come in contact with a hot exhaust system.
A scorching odor may be detected if you continue to run
a malfunctioning engine. The odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Service, including a tune-up to
manufacturer’s specifications should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed.
• Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during
very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
• Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel.
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
label affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
5
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Size
This is the minimum allowable tire size for your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of
this tire size.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front
or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Also overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
An EXAMPLE of a loaded vehicle is shown in the
following chart. Note that neither GVWR nor GAWR
capabilities are exceeded. Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten service life.
NOTE:
The weights shown in this chart are not
necessarily the weights for your vehicle. Also, the
amount of load added to both the front and rear axles
can be computed after the vehicle has been weighed
both in its ⴖcurb weightⴖ condition, and in its ⴖloaded
and ready for operationⴖ condition.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 6500 LBS.
5
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING
All Dodge Ram Pickup trucks are intended to tow trailers
up to 2,000 lbs (907 kg) without added equipment or
alterations to standard equipment. Your vehicle may be
factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing
over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep
Package. See your Dodge dealer for package content.
To Maintain Warranty Coverage
Follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Definitions
The following trailer towing related terminology definitions will assist in understanding the subsequent sections:
GROSS COMBINATION WEIGHT RATING (GCWR)
is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer
when weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings
include a 150 lb (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a
driver.) Tongue Weight (of a trailer) is the weight placed
on a vehicle’s trailer hitch by the trailer.
GROSS TRAILER WEIGHT (GTW) is the weight of the
trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition.
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL is a telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer
tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
CAUTION!
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) your new
vehicle is driven, do not tow a trailer. Doing so
may damage your vehicle.
• When first towing a trailer, limit your speed to 50
mph (80 km/h) during the first 500 miles (805 km)
of towing.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle:
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Certification label located at the
driver’s door for the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
• the tongue weight of the trailer
• the weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedules” section of this manual (Section 8). When
towing a trailer, never exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR), or Gross Combined Vehicle Weight
(GCVW).
5
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, body structure or tires.
Trailer Towing Recommendations
• All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer.
Power Wagon Models
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury. An electrically–actuated electric trailer
brake controller is recommended.
• The Axles on Power Wagon Models are trailer tow
ready and DO NOT REQUIRE any special axle lubes
or additives.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1000
lbs (454 kg) and are required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Axle Lubricant and Trailer Towing
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
• Use an approved wiring harness connector on the
trailer. Standard equipment on all RAM pickup models provides a 4-way trailer tow connector located
under the bumper. This connector contains the following vehicle circuits: park/tail lamps, left stop/turn
lamp, right stop/turn lamp, and ground. With the
optional Trailer Tow Prep package a 7-way connector
is provided with the following additional circuits:
backup lamp, trailer battery and electric brake.
NOTE: Connect trailer lighting and brakes using factory
harnesses only. Do not cut or splice wiring to the brake
circuits.
• Be sure the trailer is loaded heavier in front, with 60%
to 65% of the weight in front of the axle(s). Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can
cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which
will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure
to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many
trailer accidents.
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and
will not shift during travel. When towing cargo such
as livestock, dynamic load shifts can occur that require
the driver to maintain attention.
Trailer Towing — Hitches
With a Class I Hitch, your vehicle can be equipped to tow
trailers with a Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) of 2,000 lbs
(907 kg) maximum.
With a Class II Hitch, your vehicle can be equipped to
tow trailers with a Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) of 3,500
lbs (1 587 kg ) maximum. Tongue weight must be equal to
at least 10% of GTW, but no more than 15% of GTW.
5
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
With a Class III Hitch, your vehicle can be equipped to
tow trailers with a Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) of 5,000
lbs (2 268 kg) maximum. Factory-installed rear step
bumpers are rated a Class III hitch.
A frame mounted hitch of up to Class IV rating, as rated
by the hitch manufacturer, may also be installed. With a
Class IV Hitch, you can tow a trailer with a Gross Trailer
Weight of up to 12,000 lbs (5 443 kg) maximum depending on your vehicle equipment.
Connecting Trailer Lighting And Electric Trailer
Brakes
NOTE: A 4-way trailer tow connector, located behind
the bumper, is standard equipment on all Ram pickup
models. This connector contains the following vehicle
circuits: park/tail lamps, left stop/turn lamp, right stop/
turn lamp, and ground. With the optional Trailer Tow
Prep package a 7-way connector is also provided with the
following additional circuits: backup lamp, trailer battery
and electric brake.
NOTE: There is also a 4–way connector located under
the instrument panel, located to the left of the brake
pedal that is used for the electric brake. This connector
contains the following vehicle circuits; power ground,
battery, stop lamp switch and electric brake feed. The
4–way is optional with the trailer tow prep package.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Adding lights or electrical devices to the headlamp/
park lamp circuit can be accomplished by connecting
to the standard 4-way trailer tow connector located
behind the rear bumper. The maximum current capacity for the park lamp circuit should not exceed 15
amps total (a typical park lamp bulb can draw from
0.5 to 1.0 amperes of current).
No connections can be made to the headlamp switch
itself, because it is not designed for high current
applications. Connections to the headlamp switch
will cause the exterior lights to malfunction.
Connect trailer lighting and brakes using factory
harnesses only. Do not cut or splice wiring to the
brake circuits. Use an approved wiring harness connector on the trailer.
Trailer Weight and Trailer Tongue Weight
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) means the weight of the
trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and
equipment loaded on the trailer when in actual underway towing condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle
scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported
by the scale.
5
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tongue Weight is the weight placed on the vehicle’s
trailer hitch by the trailer. Always load a trailer with 60%
to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places
10% to 15% of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle.
Tongue weight must be equal to at least 10% of GTW, but
no more than 15% of GTW.
Trailer sway control and equalizing hitch are required for
Class III or IV trailer hitches and tongue weights above
350 lbs (159 kg).
• Class III (the bumper ball type) 500 lbs (227 kg)
Also, there are maximum tongue weight ratings that are
not to be exceeded, as follows:
• Class IV (the receiver hitch type) 1200 lbs (544 kg)
NOTE: When towing a trailer, the following requirements must be adhered to:
• GCWR must not be exceeded
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
(4) ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight.)
4. GAWR ratings
Trailer Towing Information (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)
ⴖTrailer Towing Guideⴖ
NOTE: For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website address:
http:// www.dodge.com/towing.
In Canada, refer to the following website address: http://
www.dodge.ca.
NOTE: For additional general trailer towing information refer to the following National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) website address: http://
www.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/Equipment/towing/
index.htm.
5
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror
head to provide a greater vision range when towing
extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped Out or
In). A small blindspot mirror is integrated onto the main
mirror surface.
Cooling System Tips — Trailer Towing
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
• City Driving— when stopped, put the transmission in
N (Neutral) and increase the engine idle speed.
• Highway Driving— reduce your speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
• Air Conditioning— turn it off temporarily.
• Hilly Terrain— Turn overdrive off.
See Cooling System Operating information in the Service
and Maintenance section of this manual for more information.
Automatic Transmission Oil Temperature Warning
Light
All vehicles with automatic transmissions are equipped
with a transmission sump oil temperature sensor and
warning light. If elevated transmission temperatures are
encountered, the engine controller will select the most
desirable gear until the transmission temperatures are
reduced. If transmission oil temperatures continue to
rise, a warning light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate. If this should occur, stop the vehicle, shift to
Neutral, and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
goes off.
Towing With An Automatic Transmission
Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may
shift into and out of Overdrive, or a lower gear, when
driving in hilly areas, when heavily loaded, or when
towing into heavy winds.
When this condition occurs, select TOW/HAUL mode or
shift into a lower gear to prevent excessive transmission
wear and/or overheating, and to provide better engine
braking.
NOTE: Do not exceed the following RPM while manually downshifting:
• 5600 rpm with 5.7L engines.
5
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
SNOWPLOW
CAUTION!
Dodge Power Wagon Models
NOTE: Do not use Dodge Power Wagon Models for
snowplow applications.
Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can
cause damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment
should not be added to the front end or your vehicle.
The airbag crash sensors may be affected by the
change in the front end structure. The airbags could
deploy unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a
collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely affect performance of the airbag system in an
accident. Do not expect that the airbag will perform
as described earlier in this manual
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
RECREATIONAL TOWING — 4–WHEEL DRIVE
VEHICLES (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
CAUTION!
Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a
front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing.
NOTE: The transfer case must be shifted into Neutral
(N) for recreational towing. Automatic transmissions
must be placed in P (Park) position for recreational
towing. Manual transmissions must be left in gear (not in
neutral) for recreational towing. Refer below for the
proper transfer case Neutral shifting procedure for your
vehicle.
Recreational Towing Procedure — Manual Shift
Transfer Case — If Equipped
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing:
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in N (NEUTRAL) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut OFF the engine.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Shift automatic transmission to N (NEUTRAL), or
depress the clutch on manual transmissions.
5
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Shift transfer case lever into N (NEUTRAL).
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift automatic transmission into Reverse (R).
8. Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
there is no vehicle movement.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with the transmission in Drive
(D).
10. Shut OFF the engine and place the ignition key to the
unlocked OFF position.
11. Shift automatic transmission into P (PARK).
12. Apply the parking brake.
13. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
Damage to the automatic transmission may occur if
the transmission is shifted into P (PARK) with the
transfer case in N (NEUTRAL) and the engine RUNNING. With the transfer case in N (NEUTRAL)
ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the
transmission into P (PARK)
Returning to Normal Operation — Manual Shift
Transfer Case
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Shut OFF the engine.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
4. Shift automatic transmission to N (NEUTRAL), or
depress the clutch on manual transmissions.
5. Shift transfer case lever to desired position.
6. Shift automatic transmission into P (Park).
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(NEUTRAL) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case N (NEUTRAL)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage
the internal parts.
5
TRACTION
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLATE
The equipment Identification Plate is located on the hood
inner surface.
The following information about your vehicle is displayed on this plate: Model, Wheelbase, Vehicle Identification Number, Truck Order Number, and code numbers
with descriptions of all production and special equipment on the truck as shipped from the factory.
NOTE: Always refer to the Equipment Identification
Plate When Ordering Parts.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
䡵 Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
䡵 Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
䡵 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ All Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
䡵 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 347
䡵 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ Removing The Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ 4-Wheel-Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
▫ Tire Changing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
䡵 Winch Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
6
334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS
The Hazard Warning switch is mounted on the top of the
steering column as shown in the illustration.
To engage the Hazard Warning lights, depress the button
on the top of the steering column. When the Hazard
Warning switch is activated, all directional turn signals
will flash off and on to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Push the button a second time to turn off the
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning lights will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is OFF.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning lights
may discharge your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335
ADDING FUEL
The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door about 2
inches (50 mm) inside the opening. If using a portable
fuel container, it should have a flexible nozzle long
enough to force open the restricting door.
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is in a vehicle or on a truck
bed. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling.
WARNING!
Remove the gas cap slowly to prevent fuel spray
from the filler neck which may cause injury.
The volatility of present gasolines may cause a build
up of pressure in the fuel tank that may increase
while you drive. This pressure can result in a spray
of gasoline and/or vapors when you remove the cap
from a hot vehicle. Removing the cap slowly allows
the pressure to vent and prevents fuel spray.
Never allow any lit smoking materials near the
vehicles while removing the cap or filling the tank.
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
6
336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACK LOCATION
All Models
The jack and jack tools are stored under the passenger
seat. Lift the flap on the side of the seat for access.
Remove the jack and tools by loosening the thumb screw
and sliding the assembly from under the seat.
WARNING!
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes, unless suitable supports are placed under the vehicle as a safety measure. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them
in the original carrier and location. While driving
you may experience, abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration, or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or
other objects in the vehicle may move around with
force, resulting in serious injury.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
Removing The Spare Tire
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack the truck.
Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube. Insert
the tube through the access hole between the lower
tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch
mechanism tube. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with
enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under
the vehicle. When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the
end of the cable and pull it through the center of the
wheel.
6
It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to
avoid tangling the loose cable.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Changing Procedure
WARNING!
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack. The jack is
designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle only.
It is not recommended that the jack be used for service
purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time.
Preparations
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas. Set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE
(manual transmission). On four-wheel drive vehicles,
shift the transfer case to the “4L” position.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339
• Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block
the left rear wheel.
• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking.
• Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
6
340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. For Power Wagon, when changing the front wheel,
assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the
drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under the
axle as close to the tire as possible with the drive tubes
extending to the front. Connect the jack tube extension
and wheel wrench.
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive
tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the
extension tube. Place the jack under the axle between the
spring and the shock absorber with the drive tubes
extending to the rear. Connect the jack tube extension and
wheel wrench.
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
adjust the jack position as required.
NOTE: If the jack will not lower by turning the dial
(thumb wheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the
jack drive tube in order to lower the jack.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle unstable and cause an accident. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nuts toward the wheel on the rear wheel models.
4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts
using a crisscross pattern. Correct nut tightness is 135 ft.
lbs. (183 N·m) torque. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your dealer or at a service station.
6
342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the extra tire and
wheel in the places provided.
Hub Caps
The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle
off the ground.
7. Remove wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel. This may
result in cap damage.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the jack
will not lower by turning the dial (thumb wheel) by
hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in
order to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and
tools as previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
For 2500/3500 single rear wheel (SRW) models, use the
blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the cap off.
Wheel Nuts
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the
bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
especially important during the first few hundred miles
of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly
set. All nuts should first be firmly seated against the
wheel. The nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque. Tighten the nuts to final torque in
increments. Progress around the bolt circle, tightening
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343
the nut opposite to the nut just previously tightened until
final torque is achieved. Recommended torques are
shown in the following chart.
Disc
Wheels
Type Nut Stud Size Torque
Ft. Lbs.
Cone
Flanged
9/16-18
9/16-18
120-150
130-160
Torque
Newton
Meters
160-200
190-220
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and
position it properly across the wheel opening.
For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow
with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle.
Attach the wheel wrench to the extension tube. Rotate the
winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn into place
against the underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate
until you feel the winch mechanism slip or click 3 or 4
times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the tire
several times to be sure it is firmly in place.
HOISTING
A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking
locations, refer to the graphics that show jacking locations. However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be
used on any other parts or the underbody.
CAUTION!
Never use a floor jack directly under the differential
housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle
may result.
6
344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING
You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or
towing. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way and pushing or towing a
vehicle equipped with a manual transmission may overheat and damage the catalytic converter. Also, there is a
greater risk of an accident when a vehicle is being pushed
or towed. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this
procedure carefully.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing.
Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or
allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes
in eyes or on skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes.
Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
source that has a greater than 12 volt system, i.e. Do
not use a 24 volt power source.
1. Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets which might make an unintended electrical
contact.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 345
2. Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles, place the automatic transmission in Park or
the manual transmission in Neutral, and turn the ignition
OFF.
3. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged
battery.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
6
346 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact on the engine.
WARNING!
• Do not connect the cable to the negative post of
the discharge battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode.
• During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought up above
freezing point before attempting jump start.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting
out the battery vent;
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 347
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the gear
selector rhythmically between DRIVE and REVERSE,
while applying slight pressure to the accelerator.
In general, the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure
to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine is most effective. Racing the
engine or spinning the wheels, due to the frustration of
not freeing the vehicle, may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission selector in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will
minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.
WARNING!
Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps and chains may break, causing
serious injury.
6
348 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
the main structural members of the vehicle—not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws
applying to vehicles under tow must be observed.
4-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the transfer case while towing,
always use the following method.
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
off the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow vehicle on
a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
WINCH USAGE
(See page 246 for more information.)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment— 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) . . . . . . . . . 353
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And
Tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Engine Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Emission-Related Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
7
350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Steering Linkage — Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ Front Prop Shaft Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 375
▫ Rear Axle And 4X4 Front Driving Axle Fluid
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Front Drive Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
▫ Front Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Selection Of Lubricating Grease . . . . . . . . . . . 383
▫ Noise Control System Required Maintenance
& Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
䡵 Fuse And Relay Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
▫ Clutch Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
351
䡵 Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Tailgate ID Lights (Dual Rear Wheels) . . . . . . . 403
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
▫ Headlight (Halogen)/Front Park And Turn
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
▫ Tail, Stop, Turn And Backup Lights . . . . . . . . . 398
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplight With Cargo
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
▫ Cab Top Clearance Lights — If Equipped . . . . 402
䡵 Recommended Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
7
352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT— 5.7L
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be driveable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
353
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy
and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before
any emissions tests can be performed.
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
7
354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
For states which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL light will blink for approximately 5 seconds and then remain on until the first engine crank or
the key is turned off. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
b. The MIL light will remain fully illuminated until the
first engine crank or the key is turned off. This means
that your vehicle’s OBD system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently
serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may
need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD system to update.
A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate
that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
355
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
7
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to insure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The
best time to check the engine oil level is about 5 minutes
after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the ADD and SAFE markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the ADD mark will result in a SAFE reading on these
engines.
357
Change Engine Oil
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Road conditions as well as your kind of driving affect the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following to determine if any apply to you:
• Day or night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
• Stop and go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km)
7
358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 32°C (90°F)
• Trailer towing
• Heavy Loading
• Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service)
• Off-road or desert operation
• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown on schedule ⬙A⬙ of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
Dusty Conditions
Driving through dust-laden air increases the problems of
keeping abrasive materials out of the engine. Under these
conditions, special attention should be given to the
engine air cleaner, the crankcase inlet air cleaner and the
crankcase ventilation system. Make sure that these units
are clean at all times. This will tend to reduce to a
minimum the amount of abrasive material that may enter
the engine.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacture only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
MS-6395. Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the
specification MS-6395.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Identification (API) Symbol
There is a symbol to aid you in selecting the proper
engine oil.
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils that
meet
the
requirements
of
DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Use Mopar or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
359
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Refer to your
engine oil filler cap for the recommended engine oil
viscosity for your vehicle.
For information on engine oil filler cap location, see the
Engine Compartment illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
There are a number of engine oils being promoted as
either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use
such a product, use only those oils that are API Certified
and meet the SAE viscosity standard. Follow the service
schedule that describes your driving type.
7
360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your dealer, service station, or
governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tensioner
Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic
tensioner. No belt tension adjustments are required.
However, belt and belt tensioner condition should be
inspected at the specified intervals and replaced if required. See your authorized dealer for service.
At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all
belts and tensioner should be checked for condition.
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks,
glazing or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication
of damage which could result in belt failure. Low generator belt tension can cause battery failure.
Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interference between the belts and other engine components.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emission control. New plugs should be installed at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug, malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the catalytic converter. For proper type of replacement spark
plugs, refer to the “Vehicle Emission Control Information” label in the engine compartment.
361
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Under normal driving conditions, replace the air filter at
the intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you
drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions, the filter element should be inspected periodically and replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on
Schedule “B”.
7
362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at
which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.
Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the
fuel tank, frequent filter replacement may be necessary.
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
363
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
7
364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
Emission-Related Components
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Positive Crankcase (PCV) Valve
Proper operation of the crankcase ventilation system
requires that the PCV valve be free of sticking or plugging from deposits. Deposits can accumulate in the PCV
valve and passages with increasing mileage. Have the
PCV valve, hoses, and passages checked for proper
operation at the intervals specified. If the valve is
plugged or sticking, replace with a new valve— do not
attempt to clean the old PCV valve! Check the ventilation hoses for indications of damage, weepage or plugging with deposits. Replace if necessary.
• Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance Free Battery
The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
365
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over a
battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked (+) positive
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.
Also, if a “fast charger” is used while battery is in
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
7
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Air Conditioning systems found to be contaminated with A/C System Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal
Conditioners, Compressor Oil, or Refrigerants not approved by the manufacturer, voids the warranty for the
Air Conditioning system.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.⬙
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
367
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
Front Suspension Ball Joints
4 x 2 Models
The ball joints and seals should be inspected whenever
the vehicle is serviced for other reasons.
The ball joints originally supplied with the vehicle are
permanently lubricated at the factory and do not require
service. However, if the seals on the ball joints are
damaged, the joints should be replaced. Serviceable
replacement ball joints are available.
7
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front suspension ball joints should be replaced only by a
qualified service technician using tools specially designed for this purpose. Damage to the joints and/or
suspension components may result if improper replacement procedures are used.
Front Prop Shaft Lubrication
Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil
change listed in the appropriate Maintenance Schedule
for your vehicle (Schedule “A” and “B”). Use Mopar威
type MS-6560 (lithium based grease), or equivalent.
If seals are damaged the ball joints should be replaced to
prevent leakage or contamination of the grease.
Steering Linkage — Inspection
Whenever the vehicle is hoisted, all steering linkage
joints should be inspected for evidence of damage. If
seals are damaged, parts should be replaced to prevent
leakage or contamination of the grease. Lubricate the
steering linkage regularly according to the “Maintenance
Schedule” in this manual.
Front Driveshaft Grease Fitting
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, tailgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
369
Windshield Wiper Blades
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Windshield Washers
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should
be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
7
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Mopar All
Weather Windshield Washer Solution, used with water as
directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces
the freezing point to avoid line clogging, and is not
harmful to paint or trim.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, follow the preceding safety tips.
Exhaust System Rubber Isolator and Loop-Type
Hanger — If Equipped
Inspect surfaces whenever the vehicle is hoisted for
rubber to metal separation or deep cracks. SLIGHT
CRACKING DUE TO WEATHERING DOES NOT ADVERSELY AFFECT PERFORMANCE. If, however, excessively deep localized cracks are present, or any part of the
exhaust system abnormally contacts the underbody hardware, the isolator and/or hanger should be replaced.
371
Cooling System
Cooling System Maintenance
At the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedules
Section of the manual, the system should be drained,
flushed and filled.
Inspection
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant as specified.
Inspect the entire cooling system for leaks. Check the face
of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, or
other foreign matter. If dirty, clean the radiator core with
a garden hose. With the engine OFF, gently spray water
from the back of the radiator core.
7
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Check the coolant bottle hoses for condition and tightness of the connections at both the coolant bottle and
radiator.
Check the coolant pressure cap and coolant reserve
system for proper vacuum sealing. With the engine at
normal operating temperature, note the level of the
coolant in the coolant bottle. Without removing the
pressure cap (with the engine off), drain a small amount
of coolant from the radiator draincock. If the coolant level
in the coolant bottle drops, the system is sealing properly.
Coolant Level
The coolant reserve system provides a quick visual
method of determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine idling, and warmed to the normal
operating temperature, the level of the coolant in the
coolant bottle should be between the fluid level marks.
Check the coolant level whenever the hood is raised.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no longer a need to remove the coolant pressure cap
except for checking coolant freeze point or replacement
with new antifreeze coolant.
WARNING!
Never add coolant to the radiator when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove pressure cap to
cool an overheated engine! The coolant is under
pressure and severe scalding could result.
Drain, Flush And Refill
At intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled. Refer to
your dealer or consult a service manual for proper
procedures.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant
When adding coolant, or refilling the system, a minimum
solution of 50% recommended HOAT ethylene glycol
engine coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water should be
used. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if
temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are anticipated.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE: It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing according to
the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle
is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
373
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, add the recommended concentration of
antifreeze and water to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
NOTE: Failure to follow the antifreeze concentration
and replacement recommendations, or failure to use
antifreeze formulated to prevent corrosion of all cooling
system metals, may result in radiator plugging, overheating, or cooling system leaks such as in core hole plugs.
WARNING!
Never add coolant to the radiator when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove pressure cap to
cool an overheated engine. The coolant is under
pressure and severe scalding could result.
7
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommended Engine Coolant
Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of coolants other than specified engine
coolant, may result in engine damage, and decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon as possible.
• Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. Do not store ethylene glycol-based engine
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. Prevent ingestion by animals and
children. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Pressure Cap
The coolant pressure cap must be fully tightened to
prevent the loss of coolant and to insure that the coolant
will return to the radiator from the coolant bottle. The
pressure cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is
any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing
surfaces.
375
WARNING!
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
radiator pressure cap are a safety precaution. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap.
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any
heat source or moving component which may cause heat
damage or mechanical wear.
7
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.
Brake System
Power Disc Brakes (front and rear)
Disc brakes do not require adjustment; however, several
hard stops during the break-in period are recommended
to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic
reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a
“MAX” dot and an “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be
kept within these two dots. Do not add fluid above the
MAX mark, because leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for the correct Fluid type.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
377
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point, or is unidentified as to specification,
may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.
WARNING!
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
Brake Hoses
Inspection should be performed whenever the brake
system is serviced or at intervals specified. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing or worn
spots. If there is any evidence of cracking, scuffing, or
worn spots, the hose should be replaced immediately!
Eventual deterioration of the hose can take place with
possible burst failure.
Clutch Hydraulic System
The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance-free
system. In the event of leakage or other malfunction, the
system must be replaced.
7
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Clutch Linkage
If the clutch pedal linkage begins to squeak or grunt, the
clutch pedal pivot bushings should be lubricated. Refer
to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for the correct lubricant type.
For all 2500 Model axles, the fluid level should be 1/4” ±
1/4” (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the 9.25”
Front and 3/4”± 1/4” (19 mm ± 6.4 mm) on 10.5” Rear
axles. The 11.5” Rear Axle level should be 1/4” ± 1/4”
(6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole.
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level
Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for the correct Fluid type. For normal service,
periodic fluid level checks are not required. When the
vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces
of the axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil
leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Drain and Refill
Vehicles operated in normal service do not have regularly
scheduled oil changes. If fluid has become contaminated
with water or to provide the correct viscosity grade, drain
and refill.
This inspection should be made with the vehicle in a level
position. The fluid level should be even with the bottom
of the fill hole for the Manufacturer’s C205F HD Front
Axles. The fluid level should be 5/8” (16 mm) below on
9 1/4” Manufacturer’s Rear Axles.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
379
Limited-Slip Differentials
Manual Transmission
Power Wagon Axles DO NOT REQUIRE any limited slip
oil additive (friction modifiers).
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler
plug. If the level of the lubricant is more than 1/4” (6.4
mm) below the bottom of the filler hole while the vehicle
is on level ground, enough lubricant should be added to
bring the level to the bottom of the filler hole.
Transfer Case
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler
plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the
filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type.
Front Drive Shaft
The front drive shaft contains a grease fitting which
should be serviced at every oil change (see maintenance
schedule A/B).
Lubricant Selection G56 (6 – Speed Manual
Transmission — If Equipped)
This transmission does not require periodic changing. If
it becomes necessary to add or change the fluid in this
transmission, refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants
and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
7
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be checked when the engine is
fully warmed up and the fluid in the transmission is at
normal operating temperature. Operation of the transmission with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce
the life of the transmission and of the fluid. Check the
fluid level whenever the vehicle is serviced.
Fluid Level Check – 545RFE
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature 82°C (180°F). This occurs after at
least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal operating
temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.
To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,
the following procedure must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
position ending with the lever in P (Park).
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on
both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After
adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
381
a minimum of two (2) minutes for the oil to fully drain
into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
CAUTION!
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room temperature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
normal operating temperature.
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
(10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading.
7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.
7
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Lubricant
Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type. It is important that the
transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level
using the recommended fluid.
Automatic Transmission Fluid and Filter Change
To obtain best performance and long life for automatic
transmissions, the manufacturer recommends that they
be given regular maintenance service by an Authorized
Dodge Dealer or Service Center.
CAUTION!
It is important that proper lubricant is used in the
transmission. Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants
and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturers recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
The fluid and filter(s) should be changed as specified in
the Maintenance Schedule (Section 8).
NOTE: If the transmission is disassembled for any
reason, the fluid and filter(s) should be changed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives to the transmission. Exception to
this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting
fluid leaks. The use of transmission sealers should be
avoided, since they may adversely affect seals.
Front Wheel Bearings
Front wheel bearings for all Dodge Ram Trucks are
sealed-for-life. They do not require greasing or seal
replacement. In some instances, these bearings will
“purge” excess grease and the bearing will look slightly
wet. This is normal. Periodic inspection for excess play is
recommended.
Rear Wheel Bearings — Manufacturer’s Axles
These bearings are normally considered permanently
lubricated. Cleaning and repacking is required only
when axle shafts are removed or in case of extreme water
or dust contamination.
383
Selection of Lubricating Grease
The National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI) has
developed a symbol (Certification Mark) to aid the
vehicle owner in the proper selection of grease for the
lubrication of wheel bearings and chassis components.
This symbol (an example is shown below) is located on
the grease container and identifies the application and
quality of the grease.
There are two groups
identified, those for wheel
bearings (Letter “G”) and
those for chassis (Letter
“L”) lubrication. Performance categories within
these groups result in dual
letter designations for
each group. The letter designations shown in the example are the highest
7
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
quality level available and when combined as shown can
be used for both wheel bearing and chassis lubrication.
Use only those greases that have the NLGI symbol on the
container along with the proper quality level for your
application.
Noise Control System Required Maintenance &
Warranty
All vehicles built over 10,000 lbs (4 535 kg) Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating and manufactured for sale and use in the
United States are required to comply with the Federal
Government’s Exterior Noise Regulations. These vehicles
can be identified by the Noise Emission Control Label
located in the operator’s compartment.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Required Maintenance for Noise Control Systems
The following maintenance services must be performed
every 6 months or 6,000 miles (9 600 km), whichever
comes first, to assure proper operation of the noise
control systems. In addition, inspection and service
should be performed anytime a malfunction is observed
or suspected. Proper maintenance of the entire vehicle
will help the effectiveness of the noise control systems.
Air Cleaner Assembly
Inspect air cleaner housing for proper assembly and fit.
Make certain that the air cleaner is properly positioned
and the cover is tight. Check all hoses leading to the
cleaner for tightness. The gasket between the air cleaner
housing and throttle body must be intact and in good
condition. The engine air cleaner filter must also be clean
and serviced according to the instructions outlined in the
appropriate maintenance schedule.
385
Tampering with Noise Control System Prohibited
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing
thereof: (1) the removal or rendering inoperative by any
person, other than for purposes of maintenance, repair, or
replacement, of any device or element of design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate
purchaser or while it is in use, or (2) the use of the vehicle
after such device or element of design has been removed
or rendered inoperative by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are
the acts listed below.
7
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
AIR CLEANER
• Removal of the air cleaner.
• Inverting the air cleaner lid.
• Removal of the air ducting.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
• Removal or rendering inoperative exhaust system
components including the muffler or tailpipe.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
• Removal or rendering inoperative the fan clutch.
• Removal of the fan shroud.
Noise Emission Warranty
The manufacturer warrants that this vehicle as manufactured by the manufacturer, was designed, built and
equipped to conform at the time it left the manufacturers
control with all applicable U.S. EPA Noise Control Regulations.
This warranty covers this vehicle as designed, built and
equipped by the manufacturer, and is not limited to any
particular part, component or system of the vehicle
manufactured by the manufacturer. Defects in design,
assembly or in any part, component or system of the
vehicle as manufactured by the manufacturer, which, at
the time it left the manufacturers control, caused noise
emissions to exceed Federal standards, are covered by
this warranty for the life of the vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
387
Noise Systems Maintenance Chart and Service Log Insert Month, Day, Year under column mileage closest to the
mileage at which service was performed.
MILES
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
KILOMETERS
9 600
19 000
29 000
36 000
48 000
58 000
67 000
77 000
Exhaust systeminspect
Air cleaner
assembly-inspect
ODOMETER
READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
7
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Noise Systems Maintenance Chart and Service Log Insert Month, Day, Year under column mileage closest to the
mileage at which service was performed.
MILES
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
KILOMETERS
87 000
96 000
106 000
116 000
126 000
135 000
145 000
154 000
Exhaust systeminspect
Air cleaner
assembly-inspect
ODOMETER
READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
389
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and
rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible.
• Use Mopar威 auto polish to remove road film and
stains and to polish your vehicle. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
7
390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate be kept clear
and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly
with mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To
remove heavy soil, select a nonabrasive, non-acidic
cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar cleaners are
recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh
brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective finish.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar威 touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle.
Interior Care
Use Mopar威 Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
Use Mopar威 Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery and
trim.
Mopar威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
391
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar威 Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
7
392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric
defrosters or windshields equipped with a windshield
wiper de-icer. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSE AND RELAY CENTER
393
2. Use specified fuses only.
3. Always properly reinstall the cover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
• Disconnect the Ignition-Off Draw fuse (I.O.D.) fuse
located in the Fuse and Relay Center, located in the
engine compartment. The I.O.D. cavity includes a
snap-in retainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected, without removing it from the fuse block.
Your vehicle is equipped with a fuse and relay center
located in the engine compartment near the battery.
Located on the underside of the cover is a label that
identifies each component.
1. Disconnect the battery negative (-) cable before removing the cover.
• The electronic shift transfer case should be placed in
the 4HI mode and kept in this position to minimize the
battery drain.
• As an alternative to the above steps you may, disconnect the negative cables from both batteries.
7
394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Inside
Bulb No.
Overhead Console Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TS 212-2
Dome Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7679
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
LIGHT BULBS — Outside
Bulb No.
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006LL
Headlamp (Halogen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9007QL
Park & Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157NAK
Rear License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Rear Cargo Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
Tail & Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlight (Halogen)/Front Park and Turn Lights
CAUTION!
This is a halogen bulb. Avoid touching the glass
with your fingers. Reduced bulb life will result.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
395
1. Remove the expanding fastener from the headlight
welt.
7
396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove the three (3) bolts from the headlight housing.
NOTE: The lower bolt on the driver side headlight also
retains the ambient temperature sensor between the
headlight assembly and the frame.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull the housing out from the fender to allow room to
disconnect the electrical connectors.
397
4. Unlock and pull connector straight from the base of
the headlight halogen bulb.
5. Twist connector on turn signal/park light bulb 1⁄4 turn
and remove connector and bulb from housing.
6. Remove housing from vehicle with headlight halogen
bulb in housing.
7
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
7. Twist collar on headlight halogen bulb 1⁄4 turn and
remove headlight bulb from the housing.
8. Replace headlight or turn signal bulb. Do not touch
the headlight halogen bulb.
9. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and housing.
10. Tighten the outboard fastener first.
Tail, Stop, Turn and Backup Lights
1. Remove the two (2) screws that pass through the bed
sheetmetal.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull the housing straight out from the body, with a
quick motion, to separate the housing from the body. If
not pulled straight, locators may be damaged.
399
3. Push the red lock slide in on the connector and remove
the housing from the vehicle.
4. Remove the four (4) screws from the bulb strip in the
housing.
7
400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Pull the appropriate bulb straight from the bulb strip.
7. While holding the taillight firmly in place, fasten the
top screw first.
Center High-Mounted Stoplight With Cargo Light
1. Remove the two (2) screws holding the housing/lens
to the body as shown.
• Top Bulb: Park/Turn/Hazard
• Center Bulb: Stop/Park/Sidemarker
• Bottom Bulb: Backup Lights
6. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
401
2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wiring harness to the body.
• Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
3. Turn desired bulb socket 1⁄4 turn and remove socket
and bulb from housing.
4. Pull desired bulb straight from the socket.
• Inside Bulb: Center High Mount Stop Lamp
5. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and housing.
7
402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cab Top Clearance Lights — If Equipped
1. Remove the two screws from the top of the light.
2. Rotate the socket 1⁄4 turn and pull it from the light
assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull the bulb straight from the socket and replace.
403
Tailgate ID Lights (Dual Rear Wheels)
1. Remove the two screws and housing and access the
bulb sockets from the rear.
7
404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Turn socket 1⁄4 turn counterclockwise to access the
bulb.
3. Pull bulb straight out from socket.
4. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
405
Fog Lights
1. Reach under the vehicle, unlock and twist connector
counterclockwise 1⁄4 turn and remove connector and bulb
from housing.
3. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and housing.
2. Pull bulb straight from the connector.
7
406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
34 gal.
35 gal.
128L
132L
7.0 qts.
6.6L
18.7 qts.
17.7L
Fuel
5.7L, 89 Octane
2500 Shortbed Models
2500 Longbed Models
Engine Oil (with filter)
5.7L Engine V-8, SAE 5W-20, API Certified
Cooling System
5.7L (Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
407
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection (5.7L)
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) P/N 5011764AB or equivalent.
Use SAE 5W-20, API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395. Refer to
oil viscosity chart for alternative grade.
Mopar威 Engine Oil Filter, P/N 5281090 or equivalent.
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine compartment.
89 Octane Mid-Grade, (R+M)/2 Method Preferred (87 Octane Acceptable)
7
408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case
Manual Transmission Fluid (G-56)
Front Driveshaft Grease Fitting.
Clutch Linkage
Front and Rear Axle
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid
Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid
Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid
Use Mopar威 type MS-6560 (lithium based grease), or equivalent.
Multipurpose Grease, NLGI Grade 2 E.P.
Synthetic, GL-5 SAE, 75W-90. Limited-Slip 10.5/11.5 inch Rear Axles DO
NOT REQUIRE a limited slip additive.
Mopar威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Mopar威 ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
䡵 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 410
▫ Schedule “B” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
䡵 Maintenance Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
▫ Schedule “A” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 C
S
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
410 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type in this section (Section 8) must be done at the times
or mileages specified to assure the continued proper
functioning of the emission control system. These, and all
other maintenance services included in this manual,
should be done to provide best vehicle performance and
S reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for
C vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty
H areas and very short trip driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
• Stop and go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F C (32°).
• Trailer towing.
• Snowplowing.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 411 M
• Heavy Loading.
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
• Off-road or desert operation.
• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then flush and
replace your engine coolant every 102,000 miles (163 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first and follow
schedule “B” of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of
this manual.
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule ⬙B⬙.
A
I
N
T
E
N
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi- A
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the N
C
interval that occurs first.
E
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Schedule ⬙B⬙.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in- S
tervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months C
H
whichever comes first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 412 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I At Each Stop for Fuel
N
T • Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
E
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
N
A
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuN
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
C
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Lubricate the driveshaft grease fitting and tie rod end
links.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
Once a Month
• Inspect the brake hoses.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Inspect the CV joints (if equipped) and front suspension components.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the automatic transmission fluid level.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant bottle, brake master
cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
• Check the manual transmission fluid level.
• Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
SCHEDULE “B” 413 M
Schedule “B”
Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions.
• Day or night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
• Stop and go driving.
• Extensive engine idling.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
• More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F C (32°).
• Trailer towing.
• Snowplowing.
• Heavy Loading.
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
• Off-road or desert operation.
• If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
S
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then flush and
replace your engine coolant every 102,000 miles (163 000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first and follow
schedule “B” of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of
this manual.
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine oil
at every interval shown on schedule ⬙A⬙ of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 414 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
A months, whichever comes first.
N
C Lubricate Drive Shaft Fitting.
E Rotate tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Lubricate tie rod end links.
Change rear axle fluid.
Change front axle fluid.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
3,000
(5 000)
X
6,000
(10 000)
X
9,000
(14 000)
X
12,000
(19 000)
X
15,000
(24 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B” 415 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months, whichever comes first.
Lubricate Drive Shaft Fitting.
Rotate tires.
Lubricate tie rod end links.
Change rear axle fluid.
Change front axle fluid.
Check transfer case fluid level.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.**
18,000
(29 000)
21,000
(34 000)
X
24,000
(38 000)
X
27,000
(43 000)
X
30,000
(48 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 416 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
A months, whichever comes first.
N
C Lubricate Drive Shaft Fitting.
E Rotate tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Lubricate tie rod end links.
Change rear axle fluid.
Change front axle fluid.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
33,000
(53 000)
X
36,000
(58 000)
X
39,000
(62 000)
X
42,000
(67 000)
X
45,000
(72 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B” 417 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months, whichever comes first.
Lubricate Drive Shaft Fitting.
Rotate tires.
Lubricate tie rod end links.
Drain and refill transfer case fluid.
Change rear axle fluid.
Change front axle fluid.
Change 6-spd manual transmission (G-56) fluid.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Replace spark plugs.
Replace ignition cables.
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.**
48,000
(77 000)
X
51,000
(82 000)
X
54,000
(86 000)
X
57,000
(91 000)
X
60,000
(96 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 418 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Drain and refill automatic tranmission fluid and
A change main sump filter (545RFE only).
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
48,000
(77 000)
51,000
(82 000)
54,000
(86 000)
57,000
(91 000)
60,000
(96 000)
X
SCHEDULE “B” 419 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months, whichever comes first.
Lubricate Drive Shaft Fitting.
Rotate tires.
Lubricate tie rod end links.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter.
Change rear axle fluid.
Change front axle fluid.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required.
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, if
not done at 102, 000 miles (163 000 km).
63,000
(101 000)
X
66,000
(106 000)
X
69,000
(110 000)
X
72,000
(115 000)
X
75,000
(120 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
X
8
X
M 420 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
A months, whichever comes first.
N
C Lubricate Drive Shaft Fitting.
E Rotate tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Lubricate tie rod end links.
Change rear axle fluid.
Change front axle fluid.
Check transfer case fluid level.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.**
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required.
78,000
(125 000)
X
81,000
(130 000)
X
84,000
(134 000)
X
87,000
(139 000)
X
90,000
(144 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B” 421 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months, whichever comes first.
Lubricate Drive Shaft Fitting.
Rotate tires.
Lubricate tie rod end links.
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not done at 60
months.
Flush and replace Power Steering Fluid.
Inspect brake linings.
93,000
(149 000)
X
96,000
(154 000)
X
99,000
(158 000)
X
100,000
(160 000)
102,000
(163 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 422 SCHEDULE “B”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
A months, whichever comes first.
N
C Lubricate Drive Shaft Fitting.
E Rotate tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Lubricate tie rod end links.
Drain and refill transfer case fluid.
Change rear axle fluid.
Change front axle fluid.
Change 6-spd manual transmission (G-56)
fluid.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary.
Replace spark plugs.
Replace ignition cables.
105,000
(168 000)
X
108,000
(173 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
111,000
114,000
117,000
120,000
(178 000) (182 000) (187 000) (192 000)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “B” 423 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.**
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if
required.
Drain and refill automatic tranmission fluid
and change main sump and spin-on cooler
return filter (if equipped) [545RFE only].
105,000
(168 000)
X
* This applies only if the vehicle is used for frequent
trailer towing, snowplowing, fleet vehicle or commercial
service.
**This maintenance is recommend, but not required.
108,000
(173 000)
111,000
114,000
117,000
120,000
(178 000) (182 000) (187 000) (192 000)
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime H
E
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re- D
ceipts.
U
L
E
S
8
M 424 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I Schedule “A”
N
T Miles
E
N (Kilometers)
A [Months]
N
C Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
E Lubricate Front Prop Shaft fitting.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Rotate tires.
Check transfer case fluid level.
Lubricate tie rod end links.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Replace spark plugs.
6,000
(10 000)
[6]
X
X
X
12,000
(19 000)
[12]
X
X
X
18,000
(29 000)
[18]
X
X
X
24,000
(38 000)
[24]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
30,000
(48 000)
[30]
X
v
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A” 425 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Lubricate Front Prop Shaft fitting.
Rotate tires.
Check transfer case fluid level.
Lubricate tie rod end links.
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60
months, regardless of mileage.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.**
Replace ignition cables.
36,000
(58 000)
[36]
X
X
X
42,000
(67 000)
[42]
X
X
X
48,000
(77 000)
[48]
X
X
X
54,000
(84 000)
[54]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
60,000
(96 000)
[60]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
66,000
(106 000)
[66]
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 426 SCHEDULE “A”
A
I
N Miles
T (Kilometers)
E
N [Months]
A Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
C Lubricate Front Prop Shaft fitting.
E Rotate tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Lubricate tie rod end links.
Check transfer case fluid level.
Flush and replace Power Steering Fluid.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.**
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if
required.
72,000
(115000)
[72]
X
X
X
X
78,000
(125 000)
[78]
X
X
X
X
84,000
90,000
96,000
(134 000) (144 000) (154 000)
[84]
[90]
[96]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
100,000
160 000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SCHEDULE “A” 427 M
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Lubricate Front Prop Shaft fitting.
Rotate tires.
Drain and refill transfer case fluid.
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not done at 60 mos.
Lubricate tie rod end links.
Inspect brake linings.
Inspect auto tension drive belt and replace if required.
Replace ignition cables.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect PCV Valve, replace as necessary.**
102,000
(163 000)
[102]
X
X
X
X
X
X
108,000
(173 000)
[108]
X
X
X
X
X
114,000
(182 000)
[114]
X
X
X
X
120,000
(192 000)
[120]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
428 SCHEDULE “A”
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
**This maintenance is recommend, but not required.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
䡵 Mopar威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
9
430 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 431
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to you selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Dealership name
• Vehicle identification number
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
9
432 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 433
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufacturer’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See your manufacturer’s Warranty Information Booklet
for information on warranty coverage and transfer of
warranty.
9
434 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
U.S. Vehicles Only
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 435
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Washington DC area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of
Transportation, Washington DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
9
436 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
• Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams
and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computercontrolled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
• Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 437
Call Toll Free at 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) or 1–800–387–1143
(Canada)
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com or
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
9
INDEX
10
440 INDEX
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309,335
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . 361,385
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365,366
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,365
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control . . . . . . . . 207
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296,304
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,53
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,158
Airbag On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,161
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,406
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162,284
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,161
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Automatic Transmission
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382,408
Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320,378,408
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320,378
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
INDEX 441
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283,376
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 70
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Cab Top Clearance Lights
Calibration, Compass . . .
Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . .
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
402
127
148
406
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,150,313
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 198
Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166,169,172
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313,362
CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170,181,187
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179,183,185,189,192
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Center Seat Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . 157
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,66
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,65
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
10
442 INDEX
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Clutch Linkage Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Compact Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,179
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,127
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Converter, Catalytic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,375
Selection of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,406,407
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,207,211
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202,205
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Digital Video Disc Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
INDEX 443
Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Disposal
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Driving
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Electric Rear Window Defrost
Electrical Power Outlets . . . .
Electronic Speed Control . . . .
Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . .
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck
Hazard Warning Flasher . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . 88,207,211
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 410
Emission Related Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374,407
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356,406,407
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358,406
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Equipment Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
10
444 INDEX
Ethylene Glycol Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,150,313,371
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,370,371
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,385
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360,407
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Flashers
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337,343
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113,405
Fold Flat Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Front Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,407
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,406
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Gas Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
INDEX 445
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Gear Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111,394
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 115
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,207,211
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 115
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Homelink Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Hub Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,266
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,16
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15,16
10
446 INDEX
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156,157
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Intermittent Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Key, Replacement . .
Key, Sentry . . . . . . .
Key-In Reminder . . .
Keyless Entry System
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 14
. . 13
. . 12
. . 24
12,18
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . 63
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,109
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,158
Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162,284
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Cap Top Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Check Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Dual Wheel Assembly Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113,405
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
INDEX 447
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115,158
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110,122
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Low Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Transmission Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165,327
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113,158,394,398
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 157
Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,379
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) . 63
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Maintenance . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Free Battery
Maintenance Procedures .
Maintenance Schedule . .
Schedule ⬙A⬙ . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
356
364
356
410
424
10
448 INDEX
Schedule ⬙B⬙ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Malfunction Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275,379
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379,408
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,326
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356,435
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Noise Control
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Tampering Prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384,385
Noise Emission Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Octane Rating, Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,164
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,164
Off-Pavement Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356,407
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360,407
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358,406
INDEX 449
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359,406
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Opener, Garage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122,123
Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . 123
Owner’s Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Phone, Hands-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Pickup Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 292
Positive Crankcase Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Power
Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286,367
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Power Wagon Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . 131,135
Programming Transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,135
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
10
450 INDEX
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . 372,375
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166,183
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . 166,172,183,189
Ramp Travel Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . 329
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . 330
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Relays and Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Remote Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,65
Ride Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,36,73
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 43
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,70
INDEX 451
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Folding Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31,161
Selection of Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Skid Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299,300
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
10
452 INDEX
Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Stabilizer Bars, Electronic Disconnecting . . . . . . . . 81
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286,367
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information . . . . . . . . 304
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,66
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . 291,292,304
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,82,295
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
INDEX 453
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291,292
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286,295
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Towing
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Trailering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88,326
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270,380
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
10
454 INDEX
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379,380
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267,275,379
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270,276
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163,164
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113,158,394,398
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292,315
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . 157
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117,369
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Wheel Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Wheel Flares . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,342
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,246
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Rigging Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,138
Window Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
INDEX 455
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Rear Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202,205
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115,117,369
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115,369
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
10
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement